JP6558382B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed.

JP 2012-217766 A

  However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the interest of games.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 displays first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means . First display means, first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. First dynamic display period determining means for determining a period, second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and second identification information for displaying a second determination result by the second determination means are displayed. 2 display means, second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means, and a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a specific first size paper in the first display means The first identification information to indicate the result of performing a first award game when stopped and displayed, the second identification information is stopped and displayed to indicate a particular second determination result to the second display means And a bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game when the game is performed, and the first identification information to be stopped and displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. The effect determining means for determining the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed between the dynamic display and the dynamic display being stopped and displayed , and the effect determining means An effect executing means for executing the determined effect, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and a first game condition that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. Game state setting hand that can set 2 game states And the gaming state setting means is dynamically displayed with the first identification information to be stopped and displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result, The first gaming state can be set based on the establishment of a setting opportunity for setting the first gaming state before the dynamic display is stopped .

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising display means capable of displaying the effect executed by the effect executing means .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination and the first display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means. First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and a first period for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the first dynamic display means. 1 dynamic display period determination means, 2nd determination means capable of executing the second determination, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means, A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means; and a second motion for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. specific display period determining means, for indicating a specific first determination result to the first display means The If the serial first identification information to perform the first award game when stopped and displayed, the second identification information indicating a specific second determination result is stop-displayed in the second display means The first identification information that is stopped and displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. And an effect determining means for determining an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed until the dynamic display is stopped and displayed , and the effect determined by the effect determining means. An effect executing means for executing the first game state, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination; A game state setting means capable of setting The technique state setting means displays the first identification information that is to be stopped and displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result, and then the dynamic display is stopped and displayed. The first gaming state can be set based on the fact that a setting opportunity for setting the first gaming state has been established .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, it has display means capable of displaying the effect executed by the effect executing means .

Therefore, there is an effect that an effect can be displayed .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production | presentation displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the ending of the jackpot game in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the probability change in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol is non-change after the hit fluctuation start of the 1st special symbol in 1st Embodiment, (b) is 1st implementation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol hits small during RUSH in a form. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol is changing after the hit fluctuation start of the 1st special symbol in 1st Embodiment, (b) is 1st implementation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when a 2nd special symbol stops a change during the hit fluctuation of the 1st special symbol in a form. (A) is the figure which showed an example in the state where the result of the change display of the 1st special symbol became jackpot A during RUSH in 1st Embodiment, (b) is RUSH in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example in the state where the result of the change display of the 1st special symbol became jackpot C or jackpot D. (A) is the figure which showed the card forgetting warning screen in 1st Embodiment, (b)-(d) is the timing chart which showed the timing which displays the card forgetting warning screen in 1st Embodiment. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small random number table, (c) It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for time reduction and probability change, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latency. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the usual figure fluctuation pattern table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the stop display mode selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the additional production | presentation selection table. It is a block diagram of the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in a 1st embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 outage stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit related process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation restart process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process for special figures 1 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process for special figures 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the various counter update processes performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the rush inrush command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the additional effect command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 87, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16 a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. A mouth 63, a first entrance 64, a second entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, an out port 66, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 ( (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37 (37 </ b> A, 37 </ b> A, 37 </ b> A, 37 </ b> A, 37 </ b> A ”) includes a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62. 37B) is provided. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Is called. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) determines whether the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), It is comprised so that it may be used properly according to whether it entered into the 2nd entrance 640. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, an upper first entrance 64b1 and a lower first entrance 64b2 are provided as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first entrance 64b1 and the lower first entrance 64b2 are shown, the term of the first entrance 64 will be used.

  Specifically, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain variation state, a short-time state or a normal state by a lighting state, and whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a lighting state. In addition to indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, a symbol that is out of play, or a small hit symbol, by a lighting state, and indicating the number of reserved balls by a lighting state The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when there is an entry at either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R hourly jackpot, 2R hourly jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to (or sets) a probability variation state that is a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds. The “2R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) a probability variation state in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds. In addition, “15R short-time jackpot” is a special symbol low-probability state and normal symbol high-probability state after a maximum jackpot of 15 rounds for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times). ) A jackpot to be set, and “2R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot in which the short-time state is set for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) after the maximum number of rounds is two rounds of jackpot .

  In addition, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, in other words, a state of a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. The “ordinary symbol high probability state” is a state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a game state in which the electric accessory 64a is easily opened.

  In addition, the gaming state (probability change state, short time state) in which the “normal symbol high probability state” is set not only increases the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol), but also the lower first entrance 64b2 As the time for opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the game, a longer time is set as compared with the gaming state (latent probability state, normal state) in which the “ordinary symbol low probability state” is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the opened state (open state), the ball is moved to the lower first entrance 64b2 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to win. Therefore, during the probability changing state or the short time state, it becomes easy to win a ball to the lower first entrance 64b2, and it is possible to increase the number of times that the big hit lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 during the probability changing state or the time-shortening state, once It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 64a open | releases at the time of hitting more than in a normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, and the electric combination in the time and the time when the electric combination 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times the 64a is opened. In addition, during the probability change state and the short time state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per change are not changed. Only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to that in the normal state.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has a trigger (trigger) triggered by the ball entering (starting prize) into either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) in synchronization with the variable display, and a ball to the through gate 67 There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display a normal symbol (second symbol) with the passage as a trigger.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  In this manner, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the dynamic of the third symbol is displayed. By configuring the display mode to notify the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main controller 110 ( For example, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced by blinking display mode in which lighting and turning off are repeated in units of 0.1 second), the movement of the third symbol set by the sound lamp control device 113 is reduced. For example, by dynamically setting the target display mode based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), the dynamic display mode (the first symbol can be suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit 3rd design effect) It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device turns on the symbol “◯” as the normal symbol (second symbol (not shown)) and the symbol “x” alternately for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is It is configured to be in an activated state for a predetermined time (actuated to an open state).

  The time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is shorter in the high probability state (probability variation state, short-time state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol as a gaming state. Is set to be Thereby, during the high probability state of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2.

  Therefore, during the probability changing state and the short time state, it can be set as a gaming state in which the ball is likely to win the lower first entrance 64b2. In the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether the probability variation state is set as the gaming state or the short time state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed on the screen to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to guess the current gaming situation.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a plurality of gaming states in which a normal symbol high probability state is set, the same as the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The display mode is set. Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping what the current gaming state is based on the operating state of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

  It should be noted that the probability of hitting is increased in the probability changing state or in the short-time state, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a per hit are also reduced in the probability changing state or in the short-time state. When it is in a state where it is easy for a ball to enter the 1 entrance 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set shorter than in the normal state in the probability variation state or in the short time state, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. In addition, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric utility item 64a per hit may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area (right area) of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol), a short time state (special) Four game states are provided: a low probability state of a symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol, and a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol). The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

  In other words, when the latent state is set, the variation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another game state. It is possible to execute the lottery that is advantageous to the player most efficiently by defining the length to be shorter than the case where the game is performed.

  In the first embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first variable is partially changed. The first specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds × 1 time, 0.2 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times). For this reason, in the lottery of the second special symbol, even if the big win is not won, there are many opportunities to get the ball into the first specific winning port 65a and win the prize ball. It is more advantageous than the lottery. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the off-lot lottery result in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened is referred to as “small hit”.

  In the second special symbol lottery, the first special winning opening 65a is opened even in the case of a small win in addition to the big win, so that the prize ball in the latent state where the variation time of the second special symbol is short Can continue to increase. Therefore, a game can be performed in expectation of becoming a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probability variation state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in this embodiment, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probability variation state, and thus novel gaming characteristics can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Using a variable method). As a result, even when the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be performed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a big hit or small hit stop symbol, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with an outlier stop symbol. Thus, during execution of the big hit or the small hit, it is possible to prevent the problem that the other variation display is fixedly displayed with the hit or the small hit and the big hit or the small hit is started in an overlapping manner.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 2, the various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and the flow of the balls launched toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment is configured to divide the gaming area into a left area and a right area by a variable display device unit 80 disposed in the center of the gaming area. .

  In the present embodiment, the fired ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operation handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (rotated clockwise) from the initial position (in a state where the player is not rotated). A sphere is fired at a launch intensity of about. Therefore, the fired sphere finally flows back in the firing flow path formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a foul sphere. The foul sphere that has flowed back and down passes through the start position of the firing channel (the lower left end portion of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown) flow down to the upper plate 17. With this configuration, even when a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to fire a ball with a desired launch strength, the foul ball remains in the launch path and the game Can be prevented.

  Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (a state in which the player does not rotate), the ball is launched with a launch intensity sufficient to flow down the left region described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees that is the maximum amount of rotation of the operation handle 51), a sphere is launched with a launch intensity that flows down the right region described above.

  In other words, the present embodiment is configured such that the area where the ball flows down can be made different based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the player's operation. Further, although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set as the gaming state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set so that the ball flows down the left region. Instead of a game that is adjusted (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), a game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) that is performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down in the right region is performed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, while the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the player only needs to maintain the state in which the operation handle 51 is rotated to the upper limit (the state in which the operating handle 51 has been rotated 120 degrees). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily play an appropriate game.

  Next, the left side area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, the game state is a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability state), a short time state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability state), a probability variation state. Either a special symbol high probability state: a normal symbol high probability state or a latent state (special symbol high probability state: a normal symbol low probability state) is set. Also, a jackpot gaming state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result is won and a small winning game state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result is won by the small bonus is set. It is configured.

  Among them, when the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is caused to perform the left-handed game in which the ball flows down to the left area of the game board 13. A right-handed game in which a game method is guided to the player using the display screen of the provided third symbol display device 81 and a ball is caused to flow down to the left area of the game board 13 when the latent state is set. The game method is guided to the player using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, during the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the player is guided to the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) according to the game state before winning.

  In addition, as a guide method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, it is configured so that a game method suitable for the current game state is always displayed, or only after the game method is switched You may comprise so that a game method may be displayed. Also, when a game method (left-handed game in this embodiment) that is easily set for a long period of time between left-handed games and right-handed games is set as a normal game, and a game method other than normal games (right-handed game) is performed. The game method may be always displayed as guidance on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guidance display may not be performed when a left-handed game is performed.

  When there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player as in this embodiment, the other game method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one game method. That is, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether one display mode is displayed. In the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used in order to guide the game method to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, by not displaying a specific display mode, a configuration in which a player is informed of a game method may be used, or a configuration in which a player is notified using voice or a lamp may be used.

  In the left area of the game board 13, a through gate 67 and a general winning opening 63 are arranged. Further, an upper first entrance 64b1 is provided at a lower position of the variable display unit 80 so that a sphere that has flowed down the left region can enter. A lower first entrance 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided at a position below the upper first entrance 64b1. This electric accessory 64a is inserted into the lower first entrance 64b2 when a normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67. The ball is configured to be variably operated from a closed state (first state) where the ball is difficult (impossible) to an open state (second state) where the ball can easily enter the lower first entrance 64b2. ing.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, a state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed) When a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is executed. That is, the ball entering the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 is an opportunity for the lottery of the first special symbol to be executed.

  Also, in a state where the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) cannot be newly executed (the state of Special Figure 1 has already been executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed) In the case where a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, the storage means for storing the right of entrance of the ball up to a predetermined number (four) is provided. ing.

  Therefore, since the player can continue to play the game while the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is being executed, the operation of the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, only the storage means for storing the right that the ball has entered and the first special symbol are provided.

  80% of the spheres flowing down the left area by left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% (8 out of 100 balls) of the fired balls enter the upper first entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by a structure such as a plurality of nails and a windmill so as to form a sphere. Further, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, the number of balls entering the lower first entrance 64b2 is about 0%, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first entrance The spherical flow path is formed so that the number of spheres entering 64b2 is about 25%. That is, it is difficult for the balls to enter in the order of the lower first entrance 64b2 (in the open state of the electric accessory 64a), the upper first entrance 64b1, and the lower first entrance 64b2 (in the closed state of the electric accessory 64a). It is comprised so that it may become.

  As described above, the upper first entrance 64b1 and the lower first entrance 64b2 are configured to give the player a privilege of paying out a prize ball in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery of the first special symbol. Each time one ball enters, four prize balls are paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the same number (four) of prize balls is given both when the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 and when the ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different number of prize balls may be set for each.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided in the right area of the game board 13. The second entrance 640 is configured such that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by entering the ball, and a plurality of balls are entered such that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right region enter. A ball channel is formed by the nail. Here, the balls that have not entered the second entrance 640 flow down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right region.

  Although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (variation time) from when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed to when the lottery result is displayed is long. In a state in which a time variation time (10 minutes) is set and a latent state is set, a short variation time (1 second) is set.

  In other words, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the right-handed game is played rather than the left-handed game and the ball entering the first entrance 64 to execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 in order to perform the second special symbol lottery, but it is easy to enter the ball, but since the variation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is improved. It will be very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player performs a left-handed game and executes the first special symbol lottery.

  In addition, since the second entrance 640 is set with one award ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state in which a normal state is set, and a ball that is fired by a right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. Even if the ball enters the second entrance 640, the number of balls does not increase.

  Furthermore, when the short time state or the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol is in a high probability state, and the electric accessory 64a is easily opened. However, since the through gate 67 serving as a normal symbol lottery opportunity for opening the electric accessory 64a is provided only in the left region, the lower first entrance 64b2 that makes it easier for the ball to enter than in the normal state. In order to enter the ball, the player is configured to play a left-handed game.

  On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol is in a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to open, and as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the variation time of (one second) is set, it is appropriate to play the right-handed game and execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is won in a small win (winning probability is about 1/2). In the case of winning a small win, the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small hit game, and 10 for each ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65. Each prize ball is configured to be awarded.

  That is, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, by continuously executing the right-handed game to the player, the lottery of the second special symbol aiming for the small win, the small hit game, Can be executed continuously.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed at the lowermost part of the game area. The second variable winning device 650 is opened so that when the big win is won by lottery of a special symbol, the turning door 650f is operated to the front side so that a ball can be won in the second specific winning opening 650a. It is what is done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured such that a ball that has flowed down the left region by a left-handed game and a ball that has flowed down a right-hand region by a right-handed game can equally enter. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened is executed, the game method before the jackpot game is executed may be continuously executed, and the game method is given to the player. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

  When a ball enters the above-described first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is shown. ) Is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) makes a big lottery due to the first entrance switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. It is.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the second entrance switch. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) draws a jackpot, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  The first entrance 64 is a winning entrance where four balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, and the second entrance 640 receives a single ball when entering the ball. It is one of the winning entries to be paid out as prize balls. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 Are the same (both are 4) and different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (1), but the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 The number of prize balls to be paid out in this case may be different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2.

  In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first entrance 64b1 is set to 4 and the number of prize balls in the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 2, and a normal state in which the balls are difficult to enter is set. In the case where the ball is in the upper first entrance 64b1, the privilege for entering the ball is increased, and when a specific gaming state (probability change state, short-time state) is set, the ball becomes easier to enter. Even if a ball frequently enters one entrance 64b2, the player may not be allowed to acquire excessive prize balls, and the upper first entrance 64b1 may have four prize balls. When the number of winning balls at the entrance 64b2 is set to five and a specific game state (probability change state, short time state) is set, a great privilege may be given to the player.

  Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 (for example, both 5 You may comprise as a piece.

  The lower first entrance 64b2 is accompanied by an electric accessory 64a. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (regulated state), and the ball is difficult to enter the lower first entrance 64b2. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol lottery) performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, 64a is in an open state (allowable state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the lower first entrance 64b2.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher in the probability variation state and in the short-time state than in the normal state, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. In FIG. 5, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (allowed state) increases. Further, during the probability changing state or the short time state, the time for which the electric utility item 64a is opened also becomes longer than in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the lower first entrance 64b2 during the probability changing state or the short time state as compared to the normal state.

  In addition, as described above, the lower first entrance 64b2, that is, the entrance associated with the electric accessory 64a is in a state (first state) in which a ball can easily enter according to the set gaming state. It is possible to set a state where the ball is difficult to enter (second state). In other words, from the viewpoint of ease of entering a ball, the first state is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). It becomes.

  Here, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (when the first special symbol lottery is executed) and when a ball enters the second entrance 640 (the second special symbol lottery). ) Is the same, and if a special symbol low probability state is set, a lottery that will be a big winner is executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280). When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery that is a big hit with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to hit than the low probability state is executed. However, the type of jackpot that is selected (set) in the case of a jackpot is set to be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment provides the player with a “left-handed (left-handed game)” and “right-handed game” as a ball firing method (game method) according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. It can be changed to “Strike (Right-handed game)”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Out board 66 is provided in game board 13. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win (enter) any of the winning entrances (entrance entrances) 63, 64b1, 64b2, 65a, 640, 650a is shown through the out entrance 66. Not guided to the ball discharge path. The out port 66 is disposed below the lower first entrance port 64b2. In the first embodiment, the game area has one out port 66. However, other configurations may be used, and two or more out ports 66 may be provided.

  By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally collecting the balls launched into the game area into one place (the place where the out port 66 is disposed). Since it is eliminated, the degree of freedom of arrangement of various devices constituting the game area can be increased. Specifically, for example, a sphere-specific outlet that flows down the left region and a sphere-specific outlet that flows down the right region may be provided. Further, when providing a plurality of out openings, it is preferable to provide an informing means for informing the player that the entrance is an out opening. As a result, a situation in which no privilege is given even though the ball enters the entrance (in fact, the exit) provided in the game area is suppressed, and the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable. be able to.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol (decorative symbol dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine main symbols with numbers “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” on the rear symbol imitating various animals. Specifically, for example, a number “1” is assigned to a rear symbol that imitates an elephant, and a number “2” is assigned to a rear symbol that imitates a lion. In this way, by making the third symbol a display mode in which the rear symbol and the number are associated and synthesized, it is possible for the player to display the rear symbol even if the third symbol is being dynamically displayed ( The type of the 3rd symbol is roughly grasped by the color, outline, size, etc., and when the 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed, the number attached to the back symbol is identified to ensure the type of the 3rd symbol. Can be grasped.

  In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not changed, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a lottery result that is different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed. It is possible to provide games that never get bored. In addition, by setting the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol so as to be regularly changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol or the set gaming state, for example, as the third symbol The accuracy of game content prediction based on the display mode (combination of rear symbols and numbers) displayed in a stopped manner can be increased, and pleasure for the player to make predictions can be provided.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variation display is finished. It is configured to generate a jackpot later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is configured to win a small bonus as a special symbol lottery result. When the special symbol lottery result is a small bonus, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, “341”). Is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, the combination of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed is made different so that the player can easily understand the lottery result. For example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win and when the special symbol is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts vertically, and about 3/4 on the upper side is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. About 1/4 of the lower side is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in each symbol row L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are scrolled in the left-right direction (usually from right to left) with a periodicity. Is done. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the right-down diagonal lines and the right-up diagonal lines in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped (determined) on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1, the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Also, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment, and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the holding ball after a 1 second stop display (definite display) Is started. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time.

  On the other hand, when there is no reserved ball and the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the detachment of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second (determined display), the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. . This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped (determined), a demonstration effect (a customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. .

  There is rarely a situation in which there is no entry to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), because the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm. The sub display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the 3rd symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Based on the number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the number of held balls whose variation display is currently held. In the present embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. For this reason, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 4A, the sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the dynamic display of the third symbol (variable display) is performed in the main display area Dm. In this case, an effect including the effect (variable effect) is executed and the display of the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, etc. is executed in the sub display area Ds. It is not necessary to form each area shown in FIG. 1, for example, when the player is gazing at the effect for suggesting whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds A powerful effect may be executed by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols and a game guide that explains the contents of future games are executed with emphasis in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced. You may comprise so that the player can perform the presentation which is easy to understand by enlarging the display area of the display area Ds.

  Further, an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols in the main display area Dm and an area for executing a notice effect may be formed according to the set gaming state and the effect mode being executed. You may provide the area | region which performs the variable display of a 3rd symbol in the display area Ds.

  Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state. Further, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper center portion of the main display area Dm. In the small area Dm1, three 3rd symbols are displayed in a simple manner with only one of the numbers “1” to “9”. Even in the small area Dm1, a big hit is started by stopping and displaying three third symbols composed of the same numbers. Note that the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state. This is because the first special symbol lottery is executed and the second special symbol lottery is hardly executed.

  Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the special symbol variation display that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol is referred to as the main variation). A variation display of a special symbol that is hardly executed when a regular gaming method is performed (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the second special symbol is applicable) is referred to as a secondary variation.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state in which the probability variation state is set, when the big win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the long-term (up to 10 minutes) A variation display (dynamic display) is executed, and at the timing when the variation display is started, the gaming state is changed from the probability variation state to the latent certain state. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the time when the fluctuation display that is a big hit is executed until the time when the fluctuation display ends and the jackpot game is started), the second special symbol is drawn. It is configured to execute a game aiming for a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation, and the variation display of the first special symbol is the sub variation.

  In the small area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols simulating a bird's face are displayed as the number of reserved balls in the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding holding balls, the reserved symbols are executed to enter the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the change display corresponding to the holding ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed, for example, when a reserved symbol performs a special action or another character appears.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, you may comprise so that the entrance to the 2nd entrance 640 can be suspended. Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variation display effect of the 3rd symbol in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the change display effect executed in response to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the change situation of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. ) Can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  When the probability display state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, the high probability state of normal symbol Is shifted to the low probability state, and the gaming state is shifted from the probability changing state to the latent state. While this latent state is set, since the variable display (dynamic display) period for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, many lots of the second special symbol can be executed. This is a possible period (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantage Period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent state is set as the gaming state, When the player wins, the small hit game is frequently executed, and a gaming state advantageous to a player who can obtain a lot of prize balls (a special figure 2 advantageous state) is obtained.

  As described above, the period during which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that is won in the jackpot in the probability variation state. Therefore, when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game is executed. Thus, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) that are advantageous to the player are set in succession, various benefits are continuously given to the player. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a small win is won with one special symbol (Special Figure 2) and the small bonus game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (Special Figure 1) is interrupted (variable display period) Measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the suspended variable display period is resumed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. A certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special diagram 1), the other special symbol (special diagram 2) that is changing is displayed as a stop display that indicates a loss. Is configured to forcibly stop. By comprising in this way, the situation where a small hit game is performed during a big hit game can be prevented.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is varied according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the fact that the lottery result is out of the fluctuation of the other special symbol When the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (the lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the end of the provision of the second privilege (until the end of the small hit game), and is resumed after the end of the provision of the second privilege. In addition, when the lottery result of one special symbol is out of place, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  By configuring in this way, based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the lottery contents of the other special symbol (the period until the lottery result and lottery result are displayed) can be varied. A variety of playability can be provided.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can grant a privilege to a player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is varied according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the lottery result is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of control, the player is prevented from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery results that are given fewer benefits than the jackpot game (small hits) In this case, the variation table is used to prevent a bonus based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are changing at the same time, the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given by giving the privilege that is not the most advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not performed, and to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short display period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be executed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the case where the winning state is set in the state where the probability variation state is set and the first special symbol is won. Is displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period that is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the jackpot game. The second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to make the game eagerly so that the first advantageous period is set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9, display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot gaming state is set as the gaming state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays, for example, the jackpot game round currently being executed as the contents of the jackpot game. Round number display mode for indicating the number, acquired amount display mode for indicating the number of acquired balls, type of jackpot game being executed (number of rounds, game state set after the jackpot game is finished) The number of jackpots won in a period in which the non-normal state (probability change state, latent state, short time state) is continuously set without setting the normal state as the suggestion display mode and the game state (the so-called consecutive number of consecutive times) ), Etc. are displayed.

  Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5A), if the current jackpot type is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) that sets a probable change state as a gaming state after the jackpot game ends, As shown in FIG. 6 (a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) that aims to set a latent state advantageous to the player is displayed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6A, the display content of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the jackpot game ending screen, a comment “chance zone entry!” Indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 displayed during a period in which the probability change state and the latent state are set is displayed. The character 811 is configured not to appear (not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is in a period during which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A gaming state that is advantageous to the game state (a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

  With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen. Can be provided.

  In addition, a comment “Aim for RUSH !!” for aiming at setting the latent state in the main display area Dm is displayed. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a “left-handed” character is displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to perform a left-handed game. Thereby, when the probability variation state is set for the player, it is possible to easily grasp that the left game aiming at the left region is performed. In the present embodiment, the second variable prize-winning device 650 that is released during the jackpot game is a ball that is fired by a left-handed game (a ball that has flowed down the left region) or a ball that is fired by a right-handed game. , Which are arranged at positions that can be won (downstream position of the game area (see FIG. 2)) and displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the big hit game ("left-handed", "right-handed"), The game method to be guided during the jackpot game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the jackpot game is executed.

  Specifically, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined, and if it is determined that the game state in which the left-handed game is guided (normal state, short-time state, probability change state), When “left-handed” is displayed and it is determined that the game state (latent probability state) in which the right-handed game is guided is displayed, “right-handed” is displayed as the guidance display during the big hit. Thereby, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the player from changing the game method.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, a special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 display area for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, “777” is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (displaying the ending screen). It is displayed. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, “-” is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variably displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described non-variable display mode is displayed when the special symbol has not been variably displayed even once the power is turned on. By displaying this non-variable display mode, it becomes possible for the player to predict a past game history (variable history of special symbols).

  In the present embodiment, the non-variable display mode described above is configured to be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating a deviation is displayed. The display that is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 when it is determined that the elapsed period from the previous variation display has exceeded a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes). You may comprise so that a mode may be changed and displayed to an initial display mode or a non-variable display mode.

  Returning to FIG. In the state where the probability variation state is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 5B), the gaming state is such that it is easy to execute the first special symbol lottery by the left-handed game. That is, the probability variation state is a state in which the electric symbol 64a is easy to open because the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the ball is easy to enter the lower first entrance 64b2.

  The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this probability changing state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the display screen in the probability variation state. As shown in FIG. 6B, a comment “in the chance zone” indicating that the current gaming state is a probable change state is displayed in the sub display area Ds so as to scroll in the horizontal direction (from right to left). The

  In the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Even at this time, the second special symbol is not changed from the state shown in FIG. 6A (because the ball is not entered into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game). In the special figure 2 display region Dm2, the non-variable display mode “-” is continuously displayed.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of action display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probability changing state, and the lottery result (whether or not determination result) of the first special symbol in the probability changing state is stored. Accordingly, the operation display pattern of the character 811 is set differently. Accordingly, it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to predict whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol wins a big win in the probability variation state.

  After the display screen shown in FIG. 6B is displayed, when the variable display for indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol has been won is executed, the display shown in FIG. A screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variation display that wins the jackpot is started in the probability variation state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the latent probability state at the timing when a variation display indicating that the first special symbol is won in the probability variation state is started. It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, since the gaming state shifts to a state advantageous to the player (latent probability state) at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. In the state where the variable display mode indicating that the display is being performed is displayed, the display mode (display mode of “333”) of the effect symbol 813 for indicating that the game state has transitioned to the player is stopped. Is done. Thereby, the player can be made to think that the gaming state has shifted from the probability changing state to the latent state by the fact that the effect symbol 813 is stopped and displayed. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the display mode similar to the display mode of the 3rd symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the stop symbol display of the effect symbol display mode indicates a special symbol lottery result. It can be thought of as an aspect.

  In the present embodiment, a large number of small hit games can be executed by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period in which the latent state is set. Therefore, at least during the period when the latent state is set, “right-handed” for showing the player a right-handed game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment “RUSH rushed in! Please hit right” is displayed to indicate that the latent state has been set as the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbols displayed in the main display area Dm are stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of variation of the first special symbol won in the jackpot. Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to make the player think that the gaming state has shifted according to the lottery result of the effect symbol.

  Then, when the right hit game is continuously executed (during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol) during the latent state (when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing), when winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. As a result, an effect mode for indicating that the player has won the small hit is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the display screen in the latent state.

  According to FIG. 7B, in the state in which the latent state is set (during RUSH), if the lottery of the second special symbol is won, the special special symbol 1 display area Dm1 has the first special symbol. Is displayed in a variation display mode for suggesting that the game is changing (a jackpot is changing), and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a display mode “341” indicating that the player has won the jackpot is displayed. .

  Then, a treasure box 812 displayed as an effect mode in RUSH is opened, and “V” for indicating a small hit is displayed as an effect symbol 813 for indicating a game result from the inside. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that a small hit is won with the second special symbol during the latent state (during RUSH) and that the small hit game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 that is rotated when a small win is won is provided in the right region, and the game can be played with the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, even if a small hit game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only has to continue the right-handed game, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the big hit variation, and the latent probability state is set. In a state where is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) can be efficiently performed.

  Therefore, at the same time that the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state), the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second when the probability variation state is set. Both special symbols may also vary.

  In such a case, even if a display mode (see FIG. 7A) indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second currently changing state is displayed. Until the special symbol fluctuates, the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state cannot be executed, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed indefinitely even in the RUSH state. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the probability variation state), the variation state of the second special symbol (the presence or absence of variation, (Variable remaining period) is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is made different.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5 and FIG. 8, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the probability variation state), the second special symbol ( The contents of the effect when special figure 2) is fluctuating will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the second special symbol is changing at the time when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability changing state is set (see (c) of FIG. 5), the probability changing is performed. A “super chance zone” is displayed in which the degree of expectation that the RUSH state is set is higher than the “chance zone” for indicating the state.

  Here, the display content of the display screen in the “super chance zone” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 (a) is a diagram in the case where the variation won in the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol variation in the probability variation state. In other words, the “super chance zone” is a state in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, but the variation display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. It is the display mode which shows the state which is not complete | finished.

  When the “super chance zone” is set, a comment is displayed in the sub display area Ds to indicate that “in the super chance zone”. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed so as to move faster than in FIG. 6B, and the character 811 moving at high speed can easily find the treasure chest 812.

  In the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a “variation display mode” is displayed to indicate that the first special symbol is changing, and a latent state is set in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. A “variation display mode” that has been fluctuating from a point in time before is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. The display screen of the “super chance zone” shown in FIG. 8A is displayed until the timing of the special figure 2 change executed across the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probability changing state to the latent probability state, When the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is completed (see FIG. 5D), the “RUSH” entry screen is displayed to notify the player that the player has entered “RUSH” (see FIG. 8B).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8B, the contents of the screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone” will be described. FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that has entered “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, an effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure chest 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has entered “RUSH” is displayed. Then, “right-handed” for guiding the game method during the rush game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. At this time, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a change display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is changing (due to big jackpot change), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 indicates a disconnection. The display mode “346” is stopped and displayed.

  Returning to FIG. During the rush game (RUSH), that is, during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the game that frequently draws the second special symbol in which the variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing the right-handed game Is executed. In addition, although detailed explanation will be described later, in this embodiment, in the state of winning a jackpot with one special symbol (including during the jackpot fluctuation), it is possible to win a jackpot by lottery of the other special symbol It is configured not to exist. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either small hit or miss. And in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

  Therefore, during a rush game, a game that wins a small hit with a probability of 1/2 and acquires a prize ball by the small hit game continues until the big hit variation of the first special symbol is completed. In other words, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed during the rush game, the jackpot variation period of the first special symbol is fully used because the lottery is not won by the lottery of the second special symbol. Rush games can be provided.

  When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed (see FIG. 5 (f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b)). Here, with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B, a display screen at the end of the rush game (at the time of special figure 1 big hit fluctuation stop) will be described.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing display contents when a jackpot (a jackpot A (see FIG. 16A)) that is advantageous to the player is set, and FIG. These are the figures which showed typically the display content at the time of winning the big hit (hit D (refer FIG. 16 (a))) which is disadvantageous for a player.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, at the timing when the third symbol (“777”) for indicating that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16A) is won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of “346” indicating the disengagement is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, an effect symbol 813 (“super V”) indicating that the jackpot advantageous to the player has been won from the treasure chest 812 is displayed, and a comment “congratulations” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this case, a “right-handed” character, which is the same gaming method as in the latent state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9B, at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A) is won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of “346” indicating the disengagement is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, an effect symbol 813 (“End?”) Indicating that the player has won the jackpot unfavorable to the player from the treasure chest 812 is displayed, and a comment “Please return to the left” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Is done. In this case, in order to suggest to the player that the rush game has ended, the character “left-handed” which is the same game method as in the normal state is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

  9B shows the display screen when winning the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A), but when winning the jackpot C (see FIG. 16A), that is, the jackpot D The same jackpot game is executed, but the same display screen is displayed even when the game state set after the jackpot ends wins a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D, and when the jackpot game ends, The production is configured to execute an effect for playing a right-handed game. Thereby, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgetting attention calling screen displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valuable medium) into a card unit installed along with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow a ball used for a game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player has won a lot of prize balls by playing a game, he forgets that he / she has inserted the card into the card unit and forgets to take the card at the end of the game. There was something to do.

  In contrast, the present embodiment is configured to display a card forgetting attention calling screen (see FIG. 10A) at a predetermined timing (for example, during a big hit game where a winning ball can be obtained). Thereby, the situation where a player forgets to take a card can be prevented. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot that is easy to win a prize ball and a jackpot that is difficult to win as a jackpot game, and further, it is possible to set a gaming state that can frequently execute a jackpot game in a short period of time. In addition, the timing for displaying the card forgetting warning screen can be set according to the game result (accumulation of the number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

  Here, with reference to Fig.10 (a), the display content of the forgetting card alert screen is demonstrated. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the card forgetting warning screen. In this way, the operation for removing the card from the card unit is displayed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, and the comment “Please be careful not to forget to remove the card” is displayed. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10B to FIG. 10D, the display timing of the forgetting card warning screen will be described. FIG. 10 (b) shows a case where the first jackpot is “Big Jack A (see FIG. 16 (a))”, that is, the jackpot winning a lot of winning balls to the player in one jackpot game. FIG. 10C and FIG. 10D are timing charts showing the display timing of the card display (card forgotten warning alert display). In FIG. 10C and FIG. 10D, the first jackpot is “jackpot A (see FIG. 16A)”. That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgotten warning display) when winning a jackpot that can give a player a lot of prize balls in one jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), when the first jackpot (the jackpot won when the normal state is set as the gaming state) is jackpot A, a sufficient number of winning balls will be given during the jackpot. Since it will be granted, the card display is executed during the jackpot ending period (ED).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, when the first jackpot is the jackpot C, a sufficient number of winning balls cannot be given during the jackpot, and the player Since there is a possibility of renting a ball using a card, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first jackpot (jackpot C).

  In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first jackpot until the normal state is set again is regarded as an advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and the accumulated result is The card display is executed by using the card display execution condition that a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) has been reached.

  In other words, after the big hit C has been completed, if a small hit game occurs continuously, and the number of prize balls during the advantageous duration exceeds a predetermined amount, the card display is made on the small hit game ending screen. (Refer to FIG. 10 (c)) When the number of prize balls during the advantageous duration exceeds a predetermined amount by repeatedly executing the jackpot C, the card display is performed on the ending screen of the jackpot game (See FIG. 10D).

<About game state transition in the first embodiment>
Next, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a transition method from one gaming state to another gaming state for the four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

  First, a game state transition method in the case of staying in a normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player because the left-handed game is more likely to be drawn more frequently than the right-handed game because the special symbol lottery frequency is likely to increase. This is because, when left-handed, it is easy to enter the upper first entrance 64b1. In addition, as described above, in the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the small hits are not lottery. It becomes a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility that the game state may be shifted to another gaming state only when a big hit is made. There are four types of jackpots A to D that can be won in the first special symbol lottery. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, in the normal state ST1, when the jackpot is determined by a ratio of 65% in the case of winning the first special symbol, the center of FIG. Transition to the probability variation state ST2 shown in FIG. In addition, when the big win D is determined at a rate of 10% in the normal state ST1 when the first special symbol is a lottery, the game shifts to the short time state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. . On the other hand, when a big hit B is determined at a rate of 25% when the first special symbol is a lottery, the normal state is set again as the gaming state after the big hit (the normal state is looped). To do).

  In the normal state, it is normal to play the game by aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handed, but the player intentionally hits the right and the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, a part of the left-handed ball enters the second entrance 640, so that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types (bonus E to G) as the jackpot type set when winning the jackpot with the second special symbol, and the jackpot of the second special symbol was won in the normal state When the jackpot E and F are determined at a ratio of 65% in total, the game shifts to the probable change state ST2 after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot G is determined at a ratio of 35%, the game state after the jackpot ends is the normal state Is set again (loops normal state).

  In this way, in the normal state, if the first special symbol is a lottery due to the lottery, there is a possibility of shifting to a shorter time state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (big hit D), In the normal state, when the big special is won by lottery of the second special symbol, the possibility of shifting to the time-saving state becomes zero. Therefore, since the disadvantage in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by making a right turn in the normal state can be increased, it is possible to suppress irregular games. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state is configured so that a variation pattern having a long variation time (10 minutes) is set, so that the game efficiency is left-handed. Therefore, the demerit in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by performing the right handing in the normal state can be further increased.

  Next, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the probability variation state will be described. As described above, in the probability variation state, the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player because the left-handed game is more likely to be drawn more frequently than the right-handed game. It becomes. In the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state, which is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent state. When the probability change state ST2 is set, the process shifts to the latent state SP1 when the first special symbol jackpot is won (the special figure 1 jackpot variation starts).

  In the probability variation state, as in the normal state, aiming at the lower first entrance 64b2 provided below the upper first entrance 64b1, while aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handed, the game is played. Will do. That is, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set during the probability variation state, the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, the game state becomes easier to execute the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

  In the probability variation state configured as described above, a left-handed game is usually performed and a lottery of the first special symbol is executed, but a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is executed. There is a possibility that it will be a big hit by lottery. In this case, when the jackpot E and F are determined at a ratio of 65% in the case of winning the jackpot of the second special symbol, the probability variation state ST2 is set again after the jackpot ends, and is determined at a ratio of 35%. When the big hit G is reached, the short time state is set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  In other words, if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the probability variation state, it is possible to shift to the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player, while the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. In such a case, there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state. Therefore, since the demerit in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by making a right turn in the probability variation state, the irregular game can be suppressed.

  Next, a game state transition method in the case where the user stays in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent state, unlike the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the second special symbol can be drawn efficiently by playing the game with the right hand. . Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to make a right strike than to make a left strike.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won with the probability variation state set (first transition condition), and when the jackpot C is won with the probability variation state and the time reduction state set If the first transition condition is satisfied and the first transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is in the stage before the jackpot game is started, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol. When the second transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set after the big hit game is over.

  With this configuration, the timing at which the gaming state (latent probability state) that is most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that a variety of games can be given to the player. Can provide sex.

  Furthermore, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent state is set is the jackpot variation period of the first special symbol, so the period in which the latent state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be executed during the latent state in advance (when the latent state is set) in accordance with the period during which the latent state is set.

  In addition, in the state where the probability variation state is set, if the big hit C is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the latent probability state can be set both before and after the big hit game. Unexpected game play can be provided.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on second symbol display device are performed by MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a lower side of the opening / closing plate 65f of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the right side as a shaft and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. The MPU 201 receives various commands and commands via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown). Execute. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device, and the like. used.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery (and the jackpot) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first per-type counter C2 used for the above, the fluctuation-type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selection of the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores counters for the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 a in which counter values are stored for the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the entrance to the second entrance 640. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which a value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 is provided with up to four holding balls. For this reason, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not a big hit game, each counter value is When a ball enters the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and enters the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to an execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic Various settings and control processing for display) are executed. Each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, during the period when the first special symbol lottery is not possible, such as during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entrance 64, If the number of reserved balls in the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Is done. Further, when the number of reserves for the first entrance 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired, and a prize ball (four in this embodiment) is obtained. ) Is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player. In addition, the ball entered the second entrance 640 during the period when the second special symbol cannot be drawn, such as during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In some cases, each counter value or the like is not acquired, and only the winning balls (two winning balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for the first entrance 64, but is not limited thereto, and may be less than four (for example, three), It may be more than four (for example, eight). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the entrance to the second entrance 640 (variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not put on hold, but hold storage is possible as with the first entrance 64. It may be configured.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. And the random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first per random number counter C1 When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big jackpot defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot. Further, the random number value which is a small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state, short time state) of the special symbol, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Then, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “7, 8”, and if it is “7, 8”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state) of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of “0-5”, and if it is within the range of “0-5”, it is determined that it is a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the total number of 480 random number counters, in the low probability state of the special symbol, two values are defined as values for determining the jackpot, so the low probability state of the special symbol The jackpot probability at time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability when the special symbol is in a high probability state is 1/80.

  Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be small hits are set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15B, in the lottery of the first special symbol, a random number value that is a small hit is not defined. In other words, the first special symbol lottery does not win. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the obtained first random number counter C1 is within the range of “212 to 432” regardless of the gaming state, and the range of “212 to 432”. If it is within, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a small hit.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first per-random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “7, 8” is the first per-number as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. In this way, since the total number of random number values is 480 and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 2, the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is “1/240”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first per-random number counter C1, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “0-5” is the first per-random number table as described above. 202a. In this way, since the total number of random number values is 480, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 6, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is “1/80”.

  Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values of the first per-random number counter C1 that will be a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random values “212 to 432” are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. Thus, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 221 among the total number of random numbers being 480, the probability of hitting special symbols is “2211/480” (about 46%).

  Returning to FIG. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). It becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B), the small hit type (small hit A ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In the variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables corresponding to the gaming state are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the determination results. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 232, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. If the value matches the value of the random number that is the winning specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second per random number table 202c, there are 11 random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol in the low probability state (in the normal state and in the latent state) of the normal symbol as the gaming state, and the range is "0-10. " The total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233. Since the total number of random number values that can be won is 11, the probability of winning a normal symbol is “11/233”.

  On the other hand, there are 232 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (in the probability variation state and the short time state), and the range is “0 to 231”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be hit is 232, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is “232/233”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the random number value that hits the normal symbol is configured so that a difference of about 20 times between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol is provided. Yes. In addition, when the normal symbol fluctuates, and when the normal symbol is hit, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is higher than the normal symbol in the low probability state. The probability state is more advantageous (the ball is likely to enter the lower first entrance 64b2).

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds in the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of “0 to 10”, it is determined to be a hit, and the variable display on the second symbol display device is ended. Later, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened “only twice per second”. On the other hand, in the normal symbol high probability state, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231”, it is determined to be a hit, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. Later, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened “only twice per second”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the gameability is not impaired.

  The normal variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 (see FIG. 20). ) Is defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Details of the normal variation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first hit random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b, and the second hit random number table 202c, the big hit type selection table 202d, the small hit type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection are selected. At least a table 202f and an ordinary map pattern table 202g are provided.

  First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is Are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202d, the first hit The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), “big hit A” is associated with the first special symbol (special drawing 1) in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 24”. It is prescribed. This “big hit A” has 15 rounds, and a big hit game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that become “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  Then, when “big hit A” is selected, regardless of the gaming state when the big hit is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and the number of time reductions is 10,000 times. It is set (a value of 10,000 is set in the hour / hour counter 203f). That is, after the “big hit A” is completed, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

  “Big hit A” is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, which is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which a game advantageous to the normal state can be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that a privilege that is more advantageous to the player is more easily given to the player in the latent probability state than in the probability variation state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “25 to 49”, “big hit B” is associated and defined. The “big hit B” is the same big hit game as the “big hit A” described above. The number of rounds is 15 and the big hit that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). A game is set. After the “big hit B” is finished, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF, and the hour / short counter 203f is set to a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

  When the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state, a value of “0” is set in the hourly counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the reduced time state or the probable change state, the hourly counter 203f is set. A value of “100” is set. In other words, when winning the “big hit B” with the normal state set, the normal state is set after the big hit ends, whereas when winning the “big hit B” during the short-time state After the jackpot, the short time state (100 times) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that are “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  “Big Bonus B” is one of the types of jackpots with the same number of rounds as “Big Jack A”, which is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be earned. , The jackpot type is more disadvantageous than the “jackpot A”.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 89”, “big hit C” is associated and defined. The “big hit C” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is also opened in the small hit game executed when the small special is won in the second special symbol lottery. The game is configured so that it is difficult for the player to discriminate between the case where the “big hit C” is won and the case where the “small win” is won.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to know whether a big hit game or a small hit game has been executed when a hit game in which the first attacker is released is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to be in a latent state (RUSH state) in which a small hit game can be frequently executed during the big hit fluctuation period of the first special symbol. A game is played with the expectation that the winning game when one attacker is released is a small winning game. That is, it is possible to provide a novel gameability by providing a game period in which the player does not want a situation in which the jackpot game most desired by the player is normally executed.

  After the “big hit C” is finished, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, and the hour / hour counter 203f is set to a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. When the gaming state at the time of the big win is the normal state, a value of “10000” is set in the hourly counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of the big win is the short-time state or the probability variation state, the time-shortage counter 203f is set. A value of “0” is set. In other words, when winning the “big hit C” with the normal state set, the probable change state is set after the big win ends, whereas the “big hit C” wins during the probable change state or the short time state. In this case, the latent state is set after the big hit.

  In this way, in the gaming state when winning the jackpot, even if it is the same type of jackpot, the game state set after the jackpot ends is configured to be different so that the player simply aims to win the jackpot In addition to being able to watch not only the set gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the gaming state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and the probability changing state is set as a condition for setting the latent state. There are two settings: a first setting condition for starting the big hit variation of the special symbol when the symbol is set, and a second setting condition for winning the jackpot C when the probability variation state and the short time state are set. doing. That is, the degree of expectation (probability) in which the latent state is set is made different depending on the gaming state when winning the jackpot. By configuring in this way, the player is gradually increased in the degree of expectation that a game state advantageous to the player is set as the game progresses (in accordance with the set game state). Can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 40 counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 40% (40/100). “Big hit C” is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the “big hit A” and “big hit B” described above, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. However, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, since it is the only jackpot type that can set the latent state that is most advantageous to the player as the gaming state that is set after the jackpot ends, it is set after the jackpot In terms of the gaming state, it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated and defined. This “big hit D” has two rounds, and a big hit game (same as “big hit C”) that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

  After the “big hit D” is finished, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF and the value of “0” is set to the hour / short counter 203f. In other words, when “big hit C” is won, the normal state is set after the big hit. Since this “big hit D” is the same big hit game content as the above “big hit C”, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small hit game. ing.

  Since the normal state is set as described above after the end of the “big hit D”, the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) won in the “big hit D” in the state where the probability variation state is set. If executed, the jackpot game is executed after frequently playing the jackpot game during the jackpot change, and then the normal state is set.

  That is, in the latent state (RUSH state) in the case of winning the “big hit D” in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state after the “big hit D” in which the same opening operation as the small hit game is set ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player seem to have finished the latent state in which the jackpot game is executed.

  Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that are “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). “Big hit D” is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than “big hit A” and “big hit B” described above, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. It becomes. In addition, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot, which is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment has four jackpot types ("jackpot A" to "jackpot D") as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Yes. Among them, in the two jackpot types ("jackpot A", "jackpot B"), the jackpot game for which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) that is opened only during the jackpot game is to be opened is executed. In the other two jackpot types ("big hit C", "big hit D"), the big hit game with the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the small hit game as the opening target is executed.

  That is, in the first embodiment, as a special symbol jackpot, the main jackpot game ("jackpot A", "jackpot B") for the purpose of causing the player to win a prize ball and the game state are varied. And a sub jackpot game ("Big Jack C") that makes it difficult to determine whether or not the player has won the jackpot (it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot game is a jackpot game) “Big jackpot D”).

  Further, in this embodiment, since it is a game property that allows a player to acquire a prize ball by a small hit game instead of a big hit game, it is set so that it is difficult to acquire a large number of prize balls during the big hit game. (Even if a jackpot game where only a small amount of prize balls can be won depending on the type of jackpot is executed), a jackpot game aimed at changing the gaming state while suppressing discomfort to the player. Can be set.

  On the other hand, as a jackpot type by lottery of the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “0-4” is defined in association with “jackpot E”. The “big hit E” has 15 rounds, and a big hit game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that are “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

  Then, when “Big Jack E” is selected, regardless of the gaming state when the big jackpot is won, the probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON), and the number of time reductions is 10,000 times. It is set (a value of 10,000 is set in the hour / hour counter 203f). That is, after the “big hit E” is completed, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

  “Big hit E” is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, which is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which a game advantageous to the normal state can be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that a privilege that is more advantageous to the player is more easily given to the player in the latent probability state than in the probability variation state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “5 to 64”, “big hit F” is associated and defined. This “big hit F” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 60 counter values that become “big hit F”, so “big hit F” is determined when the big special win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 60% (60/100).

  Then, when “big hit F” is selected, regardless of the gaming state when the big win is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and the number of time reductions is 10,000 times. It is set (a value of 10,000 is set in the hour / hour counter 203f). That is, after the “big hit F” is completed, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

  The “big hit F” is one of the big hit types with the least number of rounds, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which a game advantageous to the normal state can be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that a privilege that is more advantageous to the player is more easily given to the player in the latent probability state than in the probability variation state. It becomes a game state advantageous to.

  “Big hit G” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “65 to 99”. The “big hit G” has two rounds, and a big hit game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 35 counter values that are “big hit G”, so “big hit G” is determined when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The proportion is 35% (35/100).

  Then, when “Big Bonus G” is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big jackpot (the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big jackpot, and the number of time reductions is zero. It is set (a value of 0 is set in the hour / hour counter 203f).

  “Big hit G” is one of the big hit types with the least number of rounds, and is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is the normal state, the gaming state set after the jackpot is also disadvantageous. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) and winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) And the ratio that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot ends is 65% (65/100), but the ratio that 15 rounds are set as the jackpot game (50% for special figure 1). , Special figure 2 is 5%), the percentage that the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is selected as the release target (50% for special figure 1 and 5% for special figure 2), the game state at the time of winning the big hit The ratio of 10000 being set in the hour / hour counter 203f after the jackpot is over when the time is in the short-time state or the probability variation state (that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol) (25% for special figure 1 and 65% for special figure 2) Are configured differently.

  In this way, by making the jackpot game content and the game state after the jackpot end different according to the type of the special symbol that won the jackpot, it becomes possible to provide the player with various games, It is possible to improve interest.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described content is configured to be different depending on the type of special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the above-described content may be configured to be different. In addition to the contents described above, for example, by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to FIG. The ratio of setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON may be varied.

  Also, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot is completed on condition that the ball has passed a specific area (for example, an area through which the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game. The gaming machine configured as described above may be configured such that the probability that a ball passes through a specific area is different between the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 2. Further, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for showing the lottery result in each gaming state set after the end of the jackpot may be configured to be different depending on the jackpot type.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16A, in this embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win in one round game. Although the upper limit value is set to “10”, the upper limit value may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit value of the opening operation in the round game may be varied depending on the winning jackpot type (or the type of special symbol won in the jackpot).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16B, details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described. The small hitting type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of small hitting when the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is a lottery. In the small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, “small hit A” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 93”. This “small hit A” is a small hit type in which the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only for 1.5 seconds × 1 during the small hit game.

  Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 94 random number values that are “small hit A”, and therefore, when a small hit is made in the second special symbol lottery, “small hit A” Is determined to be 94% (94/100).

  Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “94 to 98”, “small hit B” is defined in association with it. This “small hit B” is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.2 seconds × 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there are five random number values that are “small hit B”. Is determined to be 5% (5/100).

  Furthermore, “small hit C” is defined in association with the value “99” of the small hit type counter C5. This “small hit C” is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds × 8 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there is one random number value that is “small hitting C”. The ratio is 1% (1/100).

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202f defines a random value for determining a variation pattern (variation time) for variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f is a normal table 202f1 for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a normal state, and for time reduction / probability change for determining a fluctuation pattern in a short time state and a probability variation state. A table 202f2 and a latent probability table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latent probability state are included at least. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. In each table shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the variation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the variation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

  First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 includes a random value (variation type) for determining a variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (result of determination). Counter value CS1) is defined.

  Specifically, as a variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated. Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range “51-100”, super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range “101-150”, and super reach A is associated with the range “151-198”. C (30 seconds) is associated.

  On the other hand, when the special table 202f1 is referenced by the lottery of the first special symbol, the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d). Accordingly, the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern varies. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is in the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is long in the range of “0 to 70”. A variation pattern of out (12 seconds) is associated, and out of normal range (20 seconds) is associated with a range of “71 to 150”. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with outlier super reach A (30 seconds) in the range of “151 to 170”, and the outage super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 198”. It has been.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2 or 3, the variation pattern of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to a variation pattern of short deviation (8 seconds) within the range of “0 to 70”. As a value of the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern of long deviation (12 seconds) is associated with a range of “71 to 130”, and a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with a variation of “131 to 170”. ing. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the outlier super reach A (30 seconds) in the range of “171 to 185”, and the out of range 185 to 198 is associated with the outlier super reach B (30 seconds). It has been.

  Note that the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 in FIG. 35) is the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 in FIG. 33). Is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when the number of the holding balls is four.

  Thus, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a long variation time is easily selected as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). By configuring in this way, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time for storing the reserved balls and make it difficult for the fluctuation display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold is large, the fluctuation time becomes short, and it becomes difficult to store the balls on hold. Therefore, the ball enters the first entrance 64 in a state where the number of balls on hold is at the upper limit (four). Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, the outlier long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. As a result, when the right hand is made in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the variation time of 600 seconds is set every time, so that the game efficiency is much worse than when the left hand is made. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn at normal times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19A, details of the time-shortening / probability changing table 202f2 will be described. The time / probability change table 202f2 is a table that is referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a high probability state (that is, a time-short state or a probability change state) of a normal symbol is set as the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a), this time-shortening / probability changing table 202f2 is for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for each special symbol type and for each special symbol stop type (result of determination). A random value (a counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) is defined. Unlike the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18, the time reduction / probability changing table 202f2 is configured such that a different variation pattern is not selected depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. doing.

  In other words, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol in order to perform the game aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 while performing the left-handed game, There is a possibility that a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol is not changed) may occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that a variation pattern with a long variation time is easily selected. Thereby, in the normal state, the state where the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the short-time / probability changing table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19 (a) performs a left-handed game, and when the game for entering a ball into the lower first entrance 64b2 is performed, or during the probability-changing state. A data table to be referenced. At this time, during the short state and the probable change state, since the electric utility item 64a is frequently released, the game state is such that the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored.

  As described above, when the game state is set so that the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored, the variation occurs when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small like the normal table 202f1 described above. If you add a configuration that makes it easy to select a long-time variation pattern, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation that is executed when the game is rested and the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol decreases The fluctuation time of the game becomes long, and it becomes difficult to play the game efficiently during the time-short state and the probability-change state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern table (time reduction / time reduction) that is referred to in a gaming state (short time state, probability variation state) in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored, that is, a normal symbol high probability state. The probability variation table 202f2) is selected so that the variation pattern selected by the number of retained balls of the first special symbol is not different (a variation pattern having a long variation time is not selected when the number of retained balls of the first special symbol is small). ) Is composed. This makes it possible to efficiently execute the game in the short time state and the probability variation state.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the winning change state is set and the jackpot is won, the probability changing state from the probability changing state to the latent probability state at the timing when the jackpot variation starts. It is configured to move to. Specifically, when the probability variation state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Diagram 1) is performed, and when the lottery result (whether or not determination result) is a big hit, the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 is stored. When the winning special variation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes a latent state while the winning special variation (600 seconds) is executed, and when the winning special variation ends, the special figure 1 is displayed. The special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot, and the jackpot game is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the lottery and the variable display can be executed at the same time, so that the latent state is set (the special fluctuation per special figure 1). Can be made to draw the second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display period (variation time) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only in the latent state, and only the second special symbol is included. It is configured to win a small hit. By configuring in this way, the player can frequently draw lots of the second special symbol while the latent state is set (while the special variation of the special figure 1 is being executed), so that the player Can win many prize balls.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 19 (a), in this embodiment, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in a state where the probability variation state is set, 60 seconds to 600 seconds depending on the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. The second variation time is set, and this variation time directly becomes the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as a result of lottery of the special symbol, not only the result of whether or not the jackpot is won (result of determination of success / failure) but also the player can be focused on the selected variation pattern (variation time). The interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the time reduction / probability changing table 202f2 is referred to, the variation time is set to 60 seconds (1 minute) regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. When the special symbol lottery result is out of place, the outlier long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right hand is made in the short-time state and the probability variation state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the variation time of 60 seconds is set every time, so that the game efficiency is much higher than the left-handed state. Getting worse. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn in the short-time state and the certainty-change state.

  Next, the details of the latent probability table 202f3 will be described with reference to FIG. This latent probability table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a latent probability state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), this latent probability table 202f3 is a random pattern for determining the variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (result of determination). A numerical value (counter value of variation type counter value CS1) is defined. It should be noted that the latent probability table 202f3 is configured such that different variation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, similar to the above-mentioned time-shortening / probability changing table 202f2.

  This latent probability table 202f3 is used for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) during the period in which the jackpot variation of the special diagram 1 is being executed during the probabilistic state, When winning the jackpot, which is a jackpot type of “Big Jack C”, and selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) and the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) executed after the jackpot game ends. Referenced.

  This latent probability table 202f3 is selected when the first special symbol lottery is won for the contents defined in the time reduction / probability changing table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. The difference is that the value of the variation type counter CS1 defined for each variation pattern is different from the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol, The rest is the same. Detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, the fluctuation pattern determined when the first special symbol is a lottery is determined as a fluctuation pattern in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 falls within the range of “0 to 39” and the normal fluctuation (60 Seconds), a super variation (180 seconds) is associated with the range of “40 to 119”, and a special variation (600 seconds) is associated with the range of “120 to 198”.

  On the other hand, if the lottery of the first special symbol is lost and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) ) And the middle fluctuation (30 seconds) are associated with each other regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. When the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the out-of-range short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Thereby, many lotteries (fluctuations) of the second special symbol can be executed during the latent state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the details of the common map variation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g is a table that is referred to in order to select the variation pattern of the normal symbol when the normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, the normal variation pattern table 202 g includes a range of values of the general variation type counter CS <b> 2 and a variation pattern (variation time) for each gaming state when the normal symbol lottery is executed. Are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the normal state, the latent state, that is, the low probability state of the normal symbol, the entire range of values that can be taken by the normal variation type counter CS2 ( 0 to 198) is associated with a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds. Similarly, when the gaming state is in a probable variation state, a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of values that can be taken by the normal variation type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a short-time state, a probable variation state, that is, a normal symbol high probability state, the variation value of the normal variation type counter CS2 is within the range of “0 to 198” and the variation time is 3 seconds. Patterns are associated.

  In the first embodiment, a plurality of variation pattern variations are provided only in the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may be varied. When the normal symbol lottery is executed in the latent probability state, the variation time is 2 of 1 second or 3 seconds. The configuration may be such that any one of the types is set. The variation time is not limited to two types, and more variation times may be selected. The more variation the variation time has, the less likely the player will be able to predict the variation time, so that it is possible to make the right handing more reliably and continuously in the latent state.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the acquired common symbol variation type counter CS2, but in addition to this, based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol Alternatively, a configuration in which the variation time is changed, a configuration in which the variation time is changed based on the number of times of drawing a special symbol, or a configuration in which the variation time of the normal symbol is set by a method combining the various configurations described above may be used. Specifically, until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the game state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, and thereafter (for example, , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time.

  In this way, by measuring the number of special figure fluctuations (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the end of the previous jackpot, the variable time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and executed. In the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with a sense of expectation so that more advantageous fluctuation time (for example, short fluctuation time) is executed. it can.

  In addition, while the lottery of the even number of special symbols has been executed after the game state has shifted to the latent state, 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, otherwise (odd number of times) You may comprise so that 3 second may be set as a fluctuation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by changing the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times that the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time. It is possible to make a right turn continuously. In this case, the special symbol lottery time is set to be longer in the state where the special symbol lottery is not executed (in comparison with the case where the special symbol lottery is executed) It may be configured such that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes longer as the number of lotteries stored on hold is smaller.

  In addition, when the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it may be configured such that a longer variation time becomes easier to select as the number of retained balls of the normal symbol increases. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is difficult to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to easily store the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol are per unit time. The number of normal symbol lotteries can be made uniform.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 203e, hour / hour counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, special figure 2 fluctuation Time counter 203n, big hit middle flag 203o, small hit middle flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203r, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, ordinary figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, In addition, it has at least a memory area 203z .

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the area, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the first reserved area). Among the vacant areas of the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol execution area 203b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected is stored.

  Similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area (ordinary symbol reserved ball execution area) and four reserved areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) In the vacant area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is stored in another reserved area as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which the winning data is packed into the reserved area with the area number one smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a special symbol variable display (first symbol display device 37, which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47). (See S1705). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is held in the actual variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of held balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The value of the normal symbol held ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is set to an initial value of zero, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. Each time, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1805 in FIG. 48).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the 2 through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1903 in FIG. 49: No).

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time reduction state. The hour counter 203f is set with a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type after the jackpot is over. Then, the hour / hour counter 203f is decremented by 1 in the gaming state update process executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set (see S308 in FIG. 36). When a normal symbol lottery is performed, if the value of the time-short counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a short-time state, and the normal symbol is determined by referring to the table for high probability. . On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol, and whether or not the normal symbol is correct is determined with reference to the table for low probability.

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and indicates that the special symbol is in a high probability state when set to ON. That is, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, as the gaming state, the probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state), One of the normal symbols (low probability state) is set.

  The probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot for setting a probability change state or a latent probability state after the jackpot is ended (S2402: Yes in FIG. 54) (FIG. 54). 54, S2403). When the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the symbol is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the special symbol jackpot winning, and the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a special symbol after a special symbol high probability state (special symbol high probability state) is set as a special symbol high probability end condition for ending the special symbol high probability state. The probability variation flag 203g may be set to OFF when the number of times of fluctuation (number of times of special figure fluctuation) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). In this case, in order to set the timing when the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF, a storage means for preliminarily storing the number of times of variation of the special figure as a special figure high accuracy end condition, and a state after the special figure high accuracy state is set. Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations, and end judgment for judging whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations (special figure high-precision termination condition) stored in the storage means And means.

  Furthermore, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy end conditions are prepared. For example, a special figure 1 high-precision end condition that can be established based only on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special figure high-accuracy state or the variation of the second special symbol A special figure 2 high-precision end condition that can be established based only on the number of times, and a lottery end condition that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small hit) Such a special figure high-accuracy end condition may be facilitated, and the probability variation flag 203g may be set to OFF when any of the special figure high-accuracy end conditions is satisfied.

  The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on entering the first entrance 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. (See S407 in FIG. 34). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

  When the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is on and the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol is completed, a process of removing the second special symbol and forcibly stopping the symbol with the symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). . Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other hits a big hit or a small hit during execution of one big hit.

  The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second entrance 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. (See S1007 in FIG. 40). The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

  When the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203i is on and the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol is finished, a process of removing the first special symbol and forcibly stopping the symbol with the symbol is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). . Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other hits a big hit or a small hit during execution of one big hit.

  The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off), the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “00H” is stored as the information indicating. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the probability change state (if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203g is on), the winning state storage area 203j indicates the probability change state. “01H” is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “02H” is stored as the information to be indicated.

  The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

  The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second inlet 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). The small hit flag 203k is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends with the small hit flag 203k turned on, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is subtracted). (Stop) is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol during the second special symbol small hit and the big hit is started during the small win. it can.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. The first special symbol and the second special symbol When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended based on the time measurement results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n.

  The big hit flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit. If this jackpot flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not hit. The jackpot medium flag 203o is set to ON when the jackpot start is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot.

  The small hitting flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is in progress. If the small hitting flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting small, and if it is off, it indicates that the small hitting is not being hit. The small hitting medium flag 203p is set to ON when the small hitting start is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol wins a small hit, and when winning a small hit (when the small hitting medium flag 203p is set to ON) It is configured to interrupt the variable display of one special symbol. That is, among the special symbols of multiple types (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is won in the lottery, and the small hitting medium flag 203p is set to ON. In this state, the display of the variation of the other special symbol (the first special symbol) does not end, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the small hit game. In addition, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variation display of the other special symbol from being ended and the big hit game from being started.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating a period from when the change of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) with the big win stop symbol to when the big hit is started. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when there is a new entry to the second entrance 640. (See S901 in FIG. 39: Yes). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped (see S802 in FIG. 38), and the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. In this case, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

  The common figure short variation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) was short variation (fluctuation for three seconds). This shows that a short variation of the symbol has been executed. This normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t determines that the timing for setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is in the short time state (short time) (S1811 in FIG. 48: Yes). ) Is set to ON when a variation time of 3 seconds (short variation) is set (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48). Yes), when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a win (S1818: Yes in FIG. 48), it is referred to (S1819 in FIG. 48).

  Here, when it is determined that the general-purpose short variation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819: Yes in FIG. 48), it is determined whether the current time is in the short-time state (short-time) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), When it is determined that the time is short (short time) (S1821: Yes in FIG. 48), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (FIG. 48). 48 S1822). It is to be noted that the common figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to OFF after it is determined that it is set to ON in the normal symbol fluctuation process (S106 in FIG. 48) (S1820 in FIG. 48).

  In this way, the gaming state at the time of starting the change of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the variable time is set) and the setting of the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed. Since the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric utility item 64a only when both of the gaming states are in the short-time state, a plurality of gaming states (normal states) It is possible to reliably prevent the electric player 64a from being released for a long time by the variation (lottery) of the normal symbols executed across the time-short state), and a privilege advantageous to the player (long of the electric player 64a It is possible to suppress excessively providing (open) to the player.

  The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) the first specific winning opening 65a in the small hit game round. When the value of the winning counter 203u is 10 which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). Even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10 in each jackpot round, the round ends when the round period set for the round is reached. The value of the winning counter 203u is incremented by 1 each time a winning ball is detected with respect to the first specific winning opening 65a during the small round effective period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the above-described winning counter 203u is not limited to the small hit game, but also counts the number of balls won to the second specific winning slot 650a in each round during the big hit game. This is also used to determine whether or not the round end condition (the number of winnings reaches 10) is established, as in the small win game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific winning opening 65a as the game content of the small hit game is set to 1.5 seconds, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winning is set to 10 doing. In other words, the valid period of the round game (1.5 seconds) elapses before 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the number of winnings is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hit game can be made constant, the production over the small hit game (the period from the start of the change of one special symbol to the end of the change of the other special symbol via the small hit game) The production period of a series of productions executed in the same manner can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the change timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect, and enhance the effect.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period during which the fluctuation time update (subtraction) in the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the fluctuation time update (subtraction) is stopped. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol fluctuation process (figure 46). 32 (see S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of the reference, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as when changing is executed (S203 in FIG. 32). In other words, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v to ON. If it is determined that the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 37) is set to ON (S701 in FIG. 37: Yes), it is set to OFF (S703 in FIG. 37).

  In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won by the small bonus, so the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small bonus is the first special symbol. If the lottery of the first special symbol can be won in small hits, the special special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot, based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot (based on the fact that the jackpot game is executed) When the other special symbol's change display is forcibly stopped and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped with a combination that indicates a small hit Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game ends).

  That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed into various modes. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the game result that is most advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit), and while the variable display for indicating the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) To determine the details of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), when winning is won in the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the fluctuation time is normal fluctuation and fluctuation per 60 seconds. A fluctuation pattern command corresponding to either a super fluctuation per time of 180 seconds or a special fluctuation per fluctuation time of 600 seconds is output from the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the received fluctuation pattern command (variation time). The variation effect corresponding to the information) is set.

  Here, as the variation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds execute the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second effect is performed in the period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A stage effect mode (for example, an effect of defeating a second enemy) is executed, and a variable effect is set to execute a third stage effect mode (an effect of defeating a third enemy) during a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds. As the variation effect corresponding to the variation (180 seconds), the first 60 seconds of the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) is executed, and the second stage effect mode of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. For example, the first 60 seconds is the first stage of the production mode (for example, the first enemy is set as the fluctuation production corresponding to the normal fluctuation (60 seconds)). Defeated performance ) Change production to be executed is set to.

  In this way, the variation pattern set this time for the player is set by setting the production mode so as to delimit the variation production to be executed corresponding to the stage of the fluctuation time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to entertain the fluctuating effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type is, and enhance the effect.

  In the case of executing the above-described variation effect, the remaining time display mode for allowing the player to grasp the remaining time for the effect period set as each stage (for example, the timing at which the effect mode can shift to the next stage) It may be configured to display an effect mode that counts down the remaining time until. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to grasp in advance the period during which at least the variation effect is continuously executed (the period during which the latent state is continuously set), so that the game can be performed with peace of mind. it can.

  Also, there are multiple types of enemies that appear during the fluctuating effects, and the degree of expectation that the fluctuating effects will move to the next stage according to the types of enemies that appear (ratio where the effect mode that wins the enemy is selected) The contents of the jackpot game executed after the end of the current variable display and the game state set after the jackpot game is finished may be suggested.

  In addition, in this case, for example, when the enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is a super fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is If the variation pattern is a hit special variation (600 seconds), it may be configured to indicate that a type other than the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the effect mode (enemy type) of the variable effect by combining a plurality of elements that determine whether or not to give a privilege advantageous to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

  In the stop display mode selection table 222b, a latent state is set as a gaming state, and a period in which a small hitting game can be executed frequently (hereinafter referred to as a rush period) is set by lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table referred when selecting the stop display mode (refer to Drawing 7 (a) and Drawing 8 (b)) of the production symbol for reporting to a person. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured such that different stop display modes are selected according to the jackpot type won in the first special symbol lottery and the length of the rush period to be executed.

  Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the stop display mode selection table 222b predicts the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (number of rounds, gaming state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period. It is specified that the stop display mode of the effect symbol is set so as to be able to.

  Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special map 1), the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period is set). If the information stored in the information storage area) is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 39”. The stop display mode “111” is defined, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. .

  In addition, the “big hit A” is won and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ˜300 seconds, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 39”, and the stop display mode “333” is set in the range of “40 to 79”. ”Is defined, the stop display mode“ 333 ”is defined in the range of“ 80 to 99 ”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is stored. In the case of “301 seconds to”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “777” is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 39”, and “40 to 79”. "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "777", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "VVV".

  And among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the jackpot type which is disadvantageous to the player is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (information indicating the length of the rush period is stored) Display area) is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, when the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 39” and the stop display mode “222” is defined, a stop display mode “444” is defined in the range “40 to 79”, and a stop display mode “666” is defined in the range “80 to 99”.

  The information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ˜300 seconds, the stop display mode “444” is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 39”, and the stop display mode “666” is set in the range of “40 to 79”. ”Is defined, the stop display mode“ 111 ”is defined in the range of“ 80 to 99 ”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is stored. In the case of “301 seconds to”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 39”, and “40 to 79”. "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "333", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "333".

  Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (Special Chart 1), the second most advantageous jackpot type, “Big Jack C”, or the most unfavorable jackpot type, “Big Jack D” is won and left When the information stored in the time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the obtained effect counter 223h The stop display mode “444” is defined in the range of “0-39”, the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “40-79”, and the range of “80-99” A stop display mode “444” is defined.

  In addition, the “big hit C” and “big hit D” are won and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, When the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “0 to 39” of the acquired effect counter 223h, and the range of “40 to 79” The stop display mode “111” is defined, and the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “80 to 99” and stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (an area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). When the displayed information is “301 seconds to”, that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “333” is defined in the range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223h “0 to 39”. , In the range of 40 to 99 ", it is defined stop display mode" 777 ".

  As described above, in this embodiment, the length of the rush period and after the end of the rush period, depending on the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period starts. The content of the jackpot to be executed (type of jackpot) is configured to be suggested to the player. Thus, by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbol, it is possible to cause the player to predict future game contents.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is defined that the stop display mode of the production symbol has a predetermined law, and specifically, the stop display mode of the production symbol is “even number symbol”, “odd number symbol”, It is stipulated that the benefits given to the player increase in the order of “777” and “VVV” (the rush period becomes longer and the jackpot type becomes advantageous). In this way, by giving the display pattern stop display mode a predetermined law, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Further, since the combination of the jackpot type and the length of the rush period is selected to select the stop display mode of the effect symbol, for example, the stop display mode “111” of the effect symbol is most advantageous to the player. Only when the jackpot type “Big Jack A” is set, it is specified that even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the player is selected when “111” is displayed. In contrast to the innovative gameplay that the rush period is desired to end in 60 seconds, that is, the gameplay that normally requires a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game property in which a game result (short rush period) opposite to the normal one is desired.

  In addition, when “VVV” is displayed as the stop display mode of the effect symbol, it indicates that the most advantageous type for the player is selected for both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period. On the other hand, it is possible to play games with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the effect symbol with reference to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the gaming state (timing for stopping the effect symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is selected. It is configured to be different. Specifically, whether or not the second special symbol is changing at the time when the latent state is set (when the probability change state is set and the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts). If it is determined that the second special symbol has not fluctuated, that is, if the second special symbol can be drawn immediately after the latent state is set, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is The effect design is configured to stop and display based on the start.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changing at the time when the latent state is set (when the probability variation state is set and when the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts), In other words, unless the variation display of the second special symbol currently being executed is finished, if the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed in the state where the latent state is set, the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is performed. The effect design is configured to be stopped and displayed based on the timing at which is finished.

  With this configuration, the second special symbol lottery can be executed in a state in which the latent state is set immediately after the production symbol is stopped and the rush period is started, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. A game in the latent state can be performed without giving.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol is changed at the time when the latent state is set (when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the state of probability change is set). In the case of determination, the length of the rush period from the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is completed is determined, and if the determination result is within a predetermined time, the effect of stopping and displaying the effect symbol (Effects indicating that the rush period has started) is not executed. As a result, the effect symbol is stopped and the rush period ends if the small hit game is executed despite the fact that the rush period has started (the rush game has started). Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, since it is configured to display that the rush period (rush game) has started with an effect symbol similar to the third symbol, it is as if the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol. It is possible to make it seem as if the rush game has been executed based on the symbols being stopped and displayed. Moreover, even when the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the effect symbol is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving a player a great sense of discomfort.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, as the timing at which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special currently being executed at the timing when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is started or when the latent state is set. Although the timing at which the variable display of the symbols is stopped is used, the effect symbols may be stopped and displayed at other timings, for example, stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the winning information command indicating the winning information is analyzed and it is determined in advance that the jackpot change will be executed in the next change, immediately before the jackpot change is executed (the third pattern in the change before the jackpot change). The production symbol may be stopped and displayed at a timing when is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set.

  As described above, when using a configuration in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed before the jackpot variation is executed and the rush game is started, the second input is started from the timing when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When a game (right-handed game) aiming at the ball outlet 640 is performed, it is preferable that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next big hit fluctuation starts. As a result, as a result of performing the right-handed game based on the fact that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the second time is set before the latent probability state is set (before the big hit variation is started), that is, during the probability variation state. It is possible to prevent a situation where a special symbol lottery is executed and a period during which a rush game is executed is shortened.

  The additional effect selection table 222c is used when selecting an effect mode (additional effect mode) for resuming the variable display of the first special symbol temporarily stopped by winning the small bonus in the second special symbol lottery. It is a data table to be referred to, and is configured such that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol after resumption. Here, the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. Thus, the player predicts the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (the remaining period of the rush period) by executing the additional effect mode corresponding to the selected additional effect type. Configure to get.

  Specifically, when the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is “0 to 99”. "" Is defined as the additional effect type "none", and "added effect A" is defined as the range "100 to 198". When the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is “0 to 99”. An additional effect type “addition effect A” is defined in the range of “”, and “addition effect B” is defined in the range of “100 to 198”. When the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the acquired value of the additional effect counter 223i is in the range of “0 to 99”. In addition, an additional effect type “addition effect B” is defined, and “addition effect C” is defined in the range of “100 to 198”.

  Here, when “additional effect A” is set, the display mode of the treasure chest 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to a tattered display mode. The player can predict that the remaining rush period is small by grasping the display mode of tatters. Further, when “addition effect B” is set, a treasure chest 812 (see FIG. 7B) in a normal display mode is displayed, and when “addition effect C” is set, the normal display mode is set. A gorgeous display mode is set. If “None” is selected, an effect that does not display the treasure chest 812 during the remaining rush period is set.

  In addition, in the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23B) shown in the present embodiment, an example in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated with each other is shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Without being configured, for example, “Additional effect C” is set in the period B, and “Additional effect A” and “None” are set in the period C. Also good. As a result, an effect that is surprising to the player can be executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the embodiment, the combined game information in which the rush period and the jackpot type are combined is displayed in the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed at the timing when the rush game is started. It is configured to provide the player with game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period by providing additional effects during the rush period. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to predict more detailed game contents by comprehensively discriminating the stop display mode of the effect symbol executed as the composite game information and the effect mode of the additional effect.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, production counter 223h, additional production counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining short time count area 223k, special figure 1 variation time counter 223m, special figure 2 variation time counter 223n, remaining variation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification completed flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush display completed flag 223t, prize ball number counter 223u, power supply The disconnect flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are at least It is provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning for the first entrance 64 is detected in the main controller 110, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2 acquired according to the start win, Various information obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning prize is drawn from each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1 (whether it is a big hit, a big hit type in the case of a big win, a fluctuation pattern) Predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (whether or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variable display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the first special symbol being performed up to four times for each special symbol type.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls is stored in the special symbol by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Each type of management is managed.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. And stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 of FIG. 60). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and also stores the first special symbol stored after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display-reserved ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are respectively received when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are received when the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from main controller 110 are received. (See S4301 in FIG. 61) and off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a big hit type in the case of a big win). It is determined.

  The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Is done.

  The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by one. Updated.

  The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time the status command output from the main controller 110 is received, information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command is stored in the status setting area 223j (see S4405 in FIG. 62). . More specifically, in the state setting area 223j, a 2-bit storage area is allocated, and whether the special symbol has a high probability state or the normal symbol has a high probability state in order from the upper bit. A value indicating whether or not is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is “11B”, it means that the state is a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol). It means a certain state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol). On the other hand, “00H” means a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol).

  By updating the state setting area 223j in accordance with the state command output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The remaining short number of times area 223k is a storage area for storing the number of remaining times of the normal symbol high probability state. The remaining short number of times area 223k is updated to the number notified by the remaining short number of times command that is output every time the value of the time-short counter 203f is updated in the main controller 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining time reduction count area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the main control device 110, so that the remaining time reduction count grasped by the audio lamp control device 113 is It can be made to coincide with the actual time reduction number updated by the main controller 110.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n indicate the corresponding fluctuation time when each fluctuation display is set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed, 1 is subtracted from each value (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). The period from when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received from the main controller 110 to when the special figure 1 restart command is received is when various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed. However, the special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is not subtracted by 1.

  When the remaining variation time is calculated in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67) executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60) that the temporary stop related command has been received. Referenced (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

  The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this remaining variation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set, and the temporarily suspended first special information is displayed. The remaining period information stored when setting an additional effect in the case of resuming the variable display of symbols is referred to.

  The card notification completed flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notified), and is turned on when the card forgotten warning screen is displayed. Is set.

  The card notification enable flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notifying), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. Set to ON when certain conditions are met.

  The rush display flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not a rush game has been started in a state in which the latent state is set, and a rush entry screen (see FIG. 7) indicating that the rush game has started. When (a) and FIG. 8 (b)) are displayed, it is set to ON.

  The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls since the jackpot game is started, and the prize ball during a period in which a game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. The number is configured to be accumulated. Specifically, when it is determined in the winning association process (S4216 in FIG. 63) that a prize ball command has been received (S4505: Yes in FIG. 63), a value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added ( S4506 in FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained not only in the big hit game but also in the small hit game, and accordingly, depending on the value of the prize ball number counter 223u, The card forgotten card alert display can be executed after the winning game is finished or after the big winning game in which a small number of rounds is set.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power-off process is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 59). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58), when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58), it is constant after the power-off flag 223y is set on. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only a part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the work area information in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 74B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when entry to the entrance 64b2 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 25, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 25 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 25 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 25 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the entrance is detected at the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2. In such a case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. Are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If an entry is detected at the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 26B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the rear surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “empty stage”, respectively. . FIG. 27 shows the back E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the back face type is determined based on the back face type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 First, between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the rear image on the rear surface E is a third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is the 3rd pattern in the state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. 27A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27B, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 27C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back image shown to Fig.27 (a), and the back image of Fig.27 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 26A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “city stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a back surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, a back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and a back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage”, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 27A and 27B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIG. 27A to FIG. 27B). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 27A and 27B) is displayed as the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface BD can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back side B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is set from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface E, the images shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 27 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and FIGS. 27 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 27B to 27C and FIGS. 27C to 27A are normally used while the images of FIGS. 27A to 27B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images of FIGS. 27A and 27B, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 27B to 27C and 27C to 27A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the elapse of time by using the image data corresponding to the rear image thus made. be able to.

  Note that the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the back B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  In addition, on the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicated image data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols, which are numbered from “0” to “9” as the third symbol, are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Accordingly, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, but for resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the large opening that is normally closed will be opened repeatedly, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect to inform the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “empty stage”, “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display one of them or to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table. The last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 29) contains "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 29 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 29).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 25A to 25C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 75) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 75 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 30) to be described later describing the contents of image drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 75 (b)). In step S6303), pointer update processing (see step S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 30), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 30, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, a V interrupt process (FIG. 75 (b) Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81 (a)). ) (See S7002). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82). When other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d, they are set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b). , See S6905 of FIG. 79). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S6805 in FIG. 78B, FIG. 79, S6905). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the second per-random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5, and those counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 479, 99, 232, 99) are reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process (S105) is executed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process for passing the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are performed. The symbol variation process is executed (S106). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current big hit or small hit (S201), and if it is determined that the big hit or small hit (S201: Yes) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure variation time during the interruption is interrupted by the fact that one special figure is stopped and displayed with a winning symbol. In the process of S202, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure temporarily stopped is updated. (S203) That is, for the special figure for which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted, a process for continuing the fluctuation display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, and this process is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that the current big hit or small hit is (S201: No), whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (that is, special figure 1 fluctuates) (S204), if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not greater than 0 (0) (S204: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S208) is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to S209, in which the fluctuation process relating to FIG. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed. The first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executes the process during the special symbol 1 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) is completed, it is then determined whether it is the end time of the variation time (whether the special diagram 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206). When it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S206: No), the process of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

  In the processing of S209 to S213, the same processing as that of S204 to S207 executed for Special Figure 1 is executed. When the process of S209 is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) (S209), and the special figure 2 fluctuation is determined. If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not greater than 0 (0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process ends. Details of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S209 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is greater than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation execution process (S211) is executed. The second special symbol variation executing process (S211) executes the process during the special symbol 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is completed, it is next determined whether the variation time end timing (special diagram 2 variation time counter 203n is 0) or not (S212). When it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S212, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, a first special symbol variation start process (S208), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S208).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) ) Is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1 is subtracted (S303), and the reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice is recorded. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  When the process of S304 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  When the process of S305 ends, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 34. The value of the first special random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not the jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of S306 is completed, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 35). Although details will be described later, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is performed in the first special symbol determination result and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, a gaming state update process is then executed (S308). The game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described in detail later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the state of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the time-shortening counter 203f indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10. Is a process for updating. When the process of S308 ends, this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S204 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is won in the other special symbol lottery during the period in which the variation display (bonus variation) won in the jackpot in any one of the special symbols is executed. It is configured not to make a determination.

  In other words, in a state where it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the lapse of the fluctuation time) by one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol lottery will win a big hit, and multiple times in a short period of time It is configured to suppress winning a jackpot and giving a privilege excessively.

  In this way, by performing the process of acquiring various counter values in the same manner as the normal special symbol lottery, skipping the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process, and setting the out symbol, the other It is possible to respond quickly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state (probability change state, latent state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the random value that becomes the big hit specified in the first per random number table 202a for high probability And the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer is determined, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability is stored in the first random number table 202a. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value corresponding to the big hit matches the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is on (S405). If it is determined that the lottery result is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the jackpot (S408). Then, based on the value of the acquired winning type counter, the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value according to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j (S410), 1 is set in the time reduction counter 203f (S411), and this process is terminated.

  Here, by setting the value of the hour / short counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S306 of FIG. 34) in the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 of FIG. 33). The high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state in the gaming state update process (S308) executed later than the above. As a result, when a big win is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to set a low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the big hit variation starts. Accordingly, the probability variation state can be shifted to the latent state by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set.

  Also. By performing the process of setting the value of the hour / short counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on condition that the jackpot has been won, and the variation of the special symbol Any of the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on condition that the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times can be executed using the game state update process (S308). Thereby, even when a plurality of conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main controller 110 from becoming complicated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S405 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203h is on (S405: Yes), or in the process of S406, it is determined that the lottery result is out (S406: No), the off symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then the present process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the process of S407 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above.

  In the process of S501, if it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above is obtained in the process of S401. A jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Thus, the process proceeds to S503.

  In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, a variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the gaming state is read (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f. In the process of S505, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S505), and then a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( S506).

  When the process of S506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S507), then the first special symbol change start is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the process of S505 is performed. A value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m, and this processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the gaming state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this gaming state update processing (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only the value of the hour / short counter 203f is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol among the state of the probability variation flag 203g which is a condition for setting the gaming state and the value of the hour / short counter 203f In addition, in the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33), a process of updating the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is executed.

  Although the details will be described later, the probability variation flag 203g that is set to ON is set to OFF when the big hit variation ends and the special symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

  That is, one of the two condition elements (the state of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the hourly counter 203f) referred to when setting the gaming state is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the other condition elements By making it possible to update when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming state set by combining the two condition elements. In addition, since a specific gaming state (for example, a latent state) can be set only during a period from when the change of the special symbol is started until it is ended, it is advantageous for the player only during a predetermined period. It becomes possible to set a gaming state.

  When the game state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour / short counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S602), and a remaining short time count command indicating the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S604). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S604: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605). ). Here, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605: No), the probability variation state to which the short-time game is not given (that is, the latent probability state) indicates the latent probability state. A status command is set (S606), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S605 that the probability variation flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), since it is a normal state, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S607), and this process is performed. Exit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S604, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this process is ended as it is.

  In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set until the next special symbol jackpot is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot). In addition to this, for example, a probability variation counter is provided instead of the probability variation flag 203g, and the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted every time a special symbol variation is executed, and the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0. In some cases, the high probability state of the special symbol may be shifted to the low probability state.

  When such a configuration is used, the game state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is designated as the special figure change start game state update process, and at the timing when the special symbol change display ends separately. By providing a special figure variation stop game state update process that updates the value of the probability variation counter, a process for determining whether or not to end the high probability state of the special symbol, and whether or not to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the process for determining whether or not.

  Next, referring to FIG. 37, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. Explain. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205). In the first special symbol variation execution process (S205), when the variation time subtraction of the special diagram 1 is interrupted, the subtraction restart processing and the variation time subtraction processing are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a brief description will be given of a case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special figure 1 is changing and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that it is a hit (small hit). Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the big hit flag 203o is set to ON within the processing, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON), it is a big hit in the process of S201. Therefore, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or the small hit game) is completed and it is determined that the big hit game (or the small hit game) is not in the process of S201, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON is a big hit (or small hit) game. It is configured to be the timing at which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been resumed.

  Returning to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), then a special figure 1 change restart command is set (S702). The stop flag 203v is set to OFF (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, in the process of S701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S701: No), the processes of S702 and S703 are skipped and S704 is performed. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S704, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is updated by subtracting 1 (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S207).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S802). A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol (S804).

  When the processing of S804 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation flag 203g are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

  On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S807 is skipped and the process proceeds to S808.

  In the process of S808, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S808). Then, the process which stops the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol currently variably displayed on the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S809), and this process is complete | finished.

  Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), the process (S802 to S809) for stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big win (S801: Yes), a process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during the variable display (S803, S804) is executed.

  In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during the variable display is configured to be stopped and forcibly stopped with the symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. And it is good also as a structure which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol after the jackpot of a 1st special symbol is complete | finished. Thereby, compared with the case where it stops compulsorily by off, it can be set as a natural aspect effect. In the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S806 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). For example, using the opening period of the jackpot game, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). You may make it do.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210). In the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S210), a process for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the process related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the variation target is merely changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Detailed descriptions of elements are omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation start process (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to OFF (S902), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag that is set to ON while the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the disengagement when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on, it means that a big hit is started, and therefore the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol should not be set. For this reason, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on in the process of S901, this process is terminated without executing the processes of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b Data (various counter values) is acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether there is acquired data (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S904: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S903 that there is data (S904: Yes), a second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing a second special symbol jackpot determination based on each stored counter value is performed. Execute (S905). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S905 ends, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is then executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903 (S906). . Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S906 is completed, the above-described gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 40, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 of FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) and The differences will be mainly described.

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). And the process of S1002-S1004 for acquiring the lottery result whether it is a big win based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability change flag 203g is performed. Each of these processes is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) except that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. Control is executed.

  When the processing of S1003 or S1004 ends, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S1006: Yes), the processing of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol to the jackpot is executed, and this processing is terminated. In each of these processes of S1007 to S1010, the same processes as the processes of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) are executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1005, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or in the process of S1006, the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a jackpot. If it is determined (S1006: No), a special figure 2 out-of-range variation process for setting a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or out of the second special symbol is executed (S1011), and this process is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 of FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result is a small hit. (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, a small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), the outlier of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and then This process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 42, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1202). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on for the second special symbol. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S1007 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above.

  If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the big special jackpot of the second special symbol has been set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above, the big hit from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). The type is determined (S1204).

  When the process of S1204 is completed, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1205), and then a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to S1208.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1202 that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process proceeds to S1208. Transition.

  In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the variation start of the second special symbol (S1209), and sets the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1205 in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n ( S1210), the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1302). Then, based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B), the small hit type is selected (S1303).

  Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the small variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the variation pattern selection table thus read. Is selected (S1305). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (S1306), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, missed) (S1301: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) is read (S1307), and a deviation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1308). After that, based on the selected deviation variation pattern, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (S1309), and this process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), which is a process in the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, is performed. The contents will be explained. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S211). In the second special symbol variation execution process (S211), when the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, a process of restarting the subtraction and a process of subtracting the fluctuation time are executed.

  When the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n is updated by subtracting 1 (S1401), and the second special symbol display on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. Is updated (S1402), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stopping process (S213). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

  When the second special symbol fluctuation stopping process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S1501), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on. Is determined (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating a special figure 1 fluctuation stop is set (S1503). Next, when the processing of S1503 is finished, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and is stopped and displayed with the symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, the probability variation flag 203g, and the hourly counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the process of S1509, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S1509). Then, the process which stops the fluctuation | variation display of the 2nd special symbol currently variably displayed on the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1510), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1501 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 off stop process is executed (S1508), and the above-described S1509 and S1510 are executed. This process is executed and the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the special figure 2 outage stop process (S1508) which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 stoppage processing (S1508). In this special figure 2 off stop processing (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, off), special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of FIG. 2 is a small hit, a process for temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 1 being executed is executed.

  In the special figure 2 off stop processing (S1508), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set (S1603).

  When the process of S1603 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1604). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203k is set to OFF (S1605), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON (S1606).

  When the process of S1606 ends, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is variably stopped at the small hit symbol (S1608), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1609). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S1610), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, the variable display control of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, so the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed simultaneously. Can be displayed. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the special symbol which shows a jackpot on either one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can grasp what is not, you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) determines whether or not a game ball has entered (wins) in the first entrance (first start entrance) 64. This is a process of storing the acquired counter values in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a up to the upper limit number (maximum of four at the first entrance 64). Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In addition, a process for predicting the determination result or the variation pattern to be selected is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (starting prize) which is the first start opening (S1701). Here, it discriminate | determines using the detection result of the 1st entrance switch (not shown) which detects the entrance of the ball | bowl to the 1st entrance 64. FIG. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (the start prize has been received) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702). ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). This is discriminated whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first entrance 64 (that is, whether the reserved number is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (S1705). Various counter values such as the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is obtained. Are each stored (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of held balls (S1706).

  Next, based on the stored counter values, the first special symbol determination result, the determined hit type, and the variation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, a winning information command including the predicted determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1708), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins a first start opening (first entry opening) 64 and is newly reserved and stored, the determination result is based on the information stored and stored. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, based on the determination result of the stored hold, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the holding sphere is changed in a color different from the normal color) and displayed, or before the change starts. For example, it is possible to display a notice symbol or the like and execute an effect that suggests the result of the determination to the player.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the second symbol variation display and variation time performed in the second symbol display device 83, the lower first entrance 64b2. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated therewith.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S1801). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is performed. And in the middle of being made. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1801: Yes), it is in a state where a new normal symbol variation (lottery) cannot be started (executed). This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S1801: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (ordinary symbol changing). When it is determined (S1802) and it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (ordinary symbol variation) (S1802: No), that is, even if the current symbol is a normal symbol variation, If it is determined that there is no particular state, that is, a state in which a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be started (executed), the value of the normal symbol retention ball counter 203e (the variation display suspension in the normal symbol) The number of times M) is acquired (S1803).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S1804), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. (S1804: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S1805). The data stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1806).

  In the process of S1806, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the normal symbol hold first area → the execution area, the normal symbol hold second area → the normal symbol hold first area, the normal symbol hold third area → the normal symbol hold second area, and the normal symbol hold fourth area. → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal symbol hold third area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1807).

  Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) random number table 202c, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 10”, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, and the normal symbol When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “232”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S1808 is a normal symbol win (S1809). If it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S1809: Yes), Is set (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1809 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1812), and the processing proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

  When the process of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the process of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol high probability state (short time state) (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol high probability state (short time). (S1811: Yes), the normal symbol variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), and then the general symbol short variation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814), this process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the normal symbol is not in a high probability state (short-time state) (ordinary symbol is in a low probability state) (S1811: No), the variation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this process ends.

  Note that the short symbol variation flag 203t set to ON in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery is executed, and the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. This is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. As a result, it is possible to vary the contents of the opening operation of the electric combination 64a according to which gaming state is the normal symbol change (lottery) start timing and the opening operation timing of the electric combination 64a.

  In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the normal symbol change (lottery) is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is winning in the gaming state storage means that can always store the currently set gaming state, the gaming state when the normal symbol lottery is executed is displayed. A storage area for temporary storage may be provided. Furthermore, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing at which the normal symbol is drawn. By doing so, you may comprise so that the gaming state in the timing when the normal symbol lottery was performed can be discriminate | determined. That is, it is only necessary to provide a storage means capable of storing the currently set gaming state and a storage means capable of storing at least the gaming state set at a predetermined past timing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1802 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1816). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S1810 or the processing of S1812 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S1813, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1816 that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then a stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the process of S1817, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1810, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S1812, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. It should be noted that the period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part is lit in the blinking display (alternate display of “◯” and “x”) indicating that the second symbol is changing. (Confirmed display). Thereby, it can be made to grasp | ascertain easily that the 2nd symbol was stopped and displayed with respect to the player.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, when the second symbol display update process (S2208 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S1810 or S1812.

  When the processing of S1817 is completed, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation processing (S106) when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started next. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit (S1818). If it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S1818: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S1818: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the general-purpose short variation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

  In the process of S1819, when it is determined that the normal figure short variation flag 203t is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) is started. When it is determined that the current state is normal (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1821), and the process proceeds to S1820. To do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1819, when it is determined that the general-purpose short variation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) is started is determined to be the short-time state. If it is made (S1816: Yes), the common figure short variation flag 203t is set to OFF (S1820), and then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the short time state (short time) (S1821).

  In the process of S1821, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the short-time state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of times of opening is set. Once set (S1824), the process proceeds to S1823.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the short-time state (S1821: Yes), the timing at which the current normal symbol lottery (variation) is started, and the current gaming state (the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) Since the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to two (electrical accessory) 64a is set (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing for executing the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol, the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a that is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, Only when both are in the time-short state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening action that is advantageous to the player. For example, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol lottery ( Even if a short-time state is set before the normal symbol fluctuation time (10 seconds) ends, long open is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. There is nothing. Similarly, the normal state is set as the gaming state until the normal symbol change (lottery) executed in the state where the time reduction state is set is won and the normal symbol change stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it can suppress that the privilege (long opening of the electrically-driven accessory 64a) advantageous excessively with respect to a player is provided.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 64a from being long open in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is easy to execute a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. The period can be limited to a short time state. In the present embodiment, the gaming state at the timing at which the normal symbol lottery (variation) is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set is determined, and the gaming state set at each timing is determined. Although the above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a based on the above, other configurations may be used.

  For example, an opening operation (S1824 in FIG. 48) that is disadvantageous to the player only when the normal symbol lottery (variation) start timing and the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a are both in the normal state. It is also possible to configure so that a long opening (opening operation set in S1822 in FIG. 48) is set in other states. By configuring in this way, a benefit (long release) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations that are executed in the period before and after the short time state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the time-saving state more advantageous to the player.

  In this way, while the time reduction state is set as the gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes very short as “10 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case where the normal state is set, Since the opening period of the lower first entrance 64b2 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entrance 64b2. Become. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time reduction state is configured to end, so that the jackpot game is in the normal state. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time reduction state is continuously set unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small winning game, and the electric accessory 64a is opened for a long time, and a plurality of winning ports (first specific winning port 65a, lower first winning port) 64b2) is a specific period in which it is easy to enter the ball.

  By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, the electric accessory 64a and the lower first entrance 64b2 are arranged above the first variable winning device 65. The ball may enter the two winning holes (V winning device 65a, lower first ball opening 64b2) during the small hit game, so that the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the small hit game Can be increased, and a privilege more advantageous to the player can be given.

  Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. In the process of S1820, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is set (S1823), and this process is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S1823, the opening / closing of the electric accessory will be performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S1824 or the process of S1822 are completed.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the game ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 if there is.

  In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1902). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is less than an upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1903).

  Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1904).

  When the processing of S1904 is completed, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is used as the free reserved area (holding first 1) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The area is stored in the first area (area 1 to reserved area 4) (S1905), and the process is terminated. In the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, a state in which a ball can enter the lower first entrance 64b2 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state. .

  By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the usual prior determination result, the player can play a game without missing a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using the result of prior determination of such a normal map, not only the effect based on the determination result of the normal map but also the electric accessory 64a when the normal map is determined to be hit is opened. It is recommended to produce an effect that suggests the timing. By doing in this way, in the normal gaming state, the game is aimed at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the lower first entrance 64 b 2 (entrance accompanied with the electric accessory 64 a) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side, it is possible to switch to a game (so-called right-handed) that aims at the right side of the game board 13 before the electric accessory 64a performs the opening operation. However, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2101). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2104). If it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process proceeds to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105). (S2105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally. In this case as well, the process proceeds to S2110.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S2110. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S2111, S2112) is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization process (S2111 and S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S2113.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S2108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2113). Thereafter, the state of the probability variation flag 203g and each value of the time reduction counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the process of S2115 is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process, first, output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is transferred to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S2201).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). A jackpot control process is executed (S2204). The jackpot control process (S2204) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 53, but a process of setting the operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the big hit game process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small hitting control process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, an electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S2206). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S2206), an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 64a is executed. Thereafter, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and at the second symbol display device Variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is reached, the electric accessory 64a is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2210). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already elapsed (S2210: Yes), the process proceeds to S2201, and the processes after S2201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S2210: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2202 (S2212).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S2209, if the occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 50 has been executed, the power-off process after S2213 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S2214). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2215), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S2209 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2201 to S2208 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from the process of S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201 as in the case of initialization in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S2201). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S2201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or the first specific winning prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

  In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S2301: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2301 that a jackpot scenario has been set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303). . More specifically, in the process of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario It is determined whether the value falls within the range.

  In the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is the timing of the opening of the jackpot scenario (start of jackpot) (S2303: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

  In the process of S2305, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot is executed ( In step S2306, this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2305, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), it is next determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2305: No). S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, when the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, a total number of balls (for example, 10) are won, or the first When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has passed a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a that is currently open in the processing of S2308 is set to be closed, This process ends. Note that the above-described determination processing from S2305 to S2307 is repeated for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2309), and the ending effect is determined. Is the start timing (S2309: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S2310), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2309, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S2311). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where an ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the process of S2311, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S2311: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S2312), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot end timing (S2311: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end process (S2312) which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. This jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2312).

  In the jackpot ending process (S2312), first, based on the winning state storage area 203j, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability change jackpot (a jackpot type in which the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, determination is performed based on the jackpot type set this time. If it is determined in the process of S2402 that the current jackpot is a probable change jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probable change jackpot (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2404. Thereby, the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  Next, a value corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning read out by the processing of S2401 and the jackpot type is set in the hour / short counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when “big hit A” is set as the big hit type, “10000” is set as the value of the hour / short counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit, "Is set to" 100 "as the value of the hour / short counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100.

  When the processing of S2404 is finished, the big hit flag 203o is then set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). Thereafter, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (S2406), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, two condition elements for determining the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning and setting the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. The contents of (probability change flag 203g, hour-short counter 203f) are set. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to both the winning jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the small hit control process (S2205) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 52) performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process (S2205).

  In the small hit control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 outage stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed to determine whether or not the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the processing of S2501 (S2501: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the processing of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the process of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is changed to the small hit scenario. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the start of the opening.

  In the processing of S2503, when it is determined that it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (S2504), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S2505).

  In the process of S2505, when it is determined that it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process ends. Details of the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), it is then determined whether the round end condition for the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of balls (for example, five) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has passed a predetermined time. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S2508. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition for ending the round of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509).

  In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: Yes), a small hitting ending command is set (S2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit end timing (S2511). Here, the small hit end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2511 that it is the small hitting end timing (S2511: Yes), the small hitting medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S2512), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the small hit end timing (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process is ended. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting action setting process (S2506).

  In the small hit operation setting process (S2506), first, an open scenario in which an open operation corresponding to the number of small hit rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is terminated.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the second winning process (S2513) which is one process in the small hit control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (S2513). The second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 55), and is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port 65a as described above.

  In the second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S2701). Here, the round effective period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. If it is not the round effective period in the process of S2701 (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the current period is the round effective period (S2701: Yes), it is then determined whether a winning at the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and the specific winning opening 65a is reached. If no winning is detected (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a winning for the specific winning opening 65a is detected in the processing of S2703 (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u and updated (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or smaller than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) ( S2705: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set to be closed (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process ends.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. 72, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S4117 (see FIG. 59) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the information on the occurrence of power failure from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), the power lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S4117 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S4116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4117 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S4008. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The state setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S4008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S4008 is performed via the processes of S4004 to S4006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S4009 is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is reached via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes in S4102 to S4110. In S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S4102 to S4110 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later is set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a hold number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S4108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S4110, various counter update processes are executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of the various counter update processes will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of the command determination processing (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4113, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power off flag and the power off process flag are turned on (S4116), and the power off process is executed (S4117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (S4112), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the special command is sent from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: No), whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 or not. Is discriminated (S4203). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4203: Yes), status command processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. Details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but based on the state command output from the main controller 110, the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent probability) of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A process of setting (status) in the status setting area 223j is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that a status command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

  In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206). The fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4207), and this process is terminated. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol) Used).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S4208 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4210), and this processing is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) Used).

  In the process of S4208, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command (that is, the first And the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value. S4212), the process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is not stored, the value of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) reserved ball number counter 223c is set in the process of S4212. Only the updating process is executed.

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and therefore, every time there is a start winning, the processing of S4212 is performed. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start is started. If the reserved ball number command is notified based on winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main controller 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that a pending ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). If it is determined in the processing of S4213 that a winning information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the received winning information command information (special symbol lottery win / no-win, winning type, and variation pattern) is determined. The storage area 223b is set (S4214), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4213 that a winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received from the main controller (S4216). In the process of S4215, if it is determined that a hit related command has been received (S4216: Yes), the hit related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. The details of the winning-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but as a result of the special symbol lottery, the effect corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big win or the small win is won. Processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute display is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4215 that no hit-related command has been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a short remaining time command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4217). In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the short remaining time command has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining number update process (S4218) is executed. Details of this remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66, but for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining short time number command output from the main controller 110. Processing for setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

  In the process of S4217, if it is determined that the remaining short time command has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4219). If it is determined in the process of S4219 that a temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. Details of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but a process of determining the remaining time of the special figure change time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. When the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received, processing for setting an effect (addition effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4219 that a temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), processing according to another command is executed (S4221), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S4221, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223. If the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the process (see S4203 in FIG. 60) for determining whether a status command has been received. The process is performed before the process (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60) for determining whether a variation pattern command for each special symbol has been received.

  With this configuration, when the variation pattern command and the status command are output simultaneously from the main controller 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) of the main controller 110. Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) executed thereafter is a game. Even when a state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the gaming state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined prior to the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

  Therefore, when the jackpot of Fig. 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, and the latent probability state is set during the jackpot variation, the voice lamp control device 113 side assumes that the latent probability state is set. It is possible to easily set a variation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to a variation pattern command that becomes a big hit variation in the determined state.

  Unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed prior to the state command determination processing, the variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot variation described above is more likely to change. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received contents is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute a variation display indicating that the latent state has been set at the same time that the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state is set in this way is delayed, the timing for notifying the player that the right-handed game is to be played is delayed, so that the player feels uncomfortable. The problem of giving will occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main controller 110 side, processing for changing the gaming state after the jackpot determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the variation pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33). (Game state update process (S308 in FIG. 33)) is executed, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining the current game state (S4204 in FIG. 60) is executed first, and thereafter A variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the change display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed even though the latent state is set.

  Further, it is necessary to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110 on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, stop type command reception processing (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (S4202). This stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described below.

  In the stop type command reception process (S4202), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is displayed. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out, reach out, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4302). The process ends.

  The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is that of the second special symbol. Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. As a result, even if the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) and the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage each stop type and execute an appropriate change display. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the state command process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4204). This state command process (S4204) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the status command process (S4204) will be described below.

  In this state command process (S4204), a process for setting the current gaming state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main control device 110 is executed, and the gaming state is shifted to the latent state. And a process for setting an effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) for notifying the player that the latent state has been set, and the game state has shifted to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used for displaying the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

  In the state command process (S4204), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command is received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is a latent state (S4402). When it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating a transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, if the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), a latent notification effect that notifies the entry of the latent state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of 4402 that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), or in the process of S4403, the received command shifts to the latent state. If it is not the status command shown (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4406.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the received command is a status command indicating transition to the normal status (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a status command indicating a shift to the normal state (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described later is executed, and this processing ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a state command indicating a transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). When it is determined that the card informed flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the winning ball counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), the card informed flag 223q, the card informing flag is available 223s, the rush display flag 223t is set to OFF (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411). This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to off (S4407: No), the processes of S4408 and S4409 are skipped, the processes of S4410 and S4411 are executed, End the process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a hit related process (S4216) which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process (S4216). In the winning related process, as a result of the special symbol lottery, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the jackpot game executed when the jackpot or the jackpot is won. The process corresponding to the various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed when the big win or the small win is won.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. Based on the result, processing for displaying a card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

  In the hit-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 60) has received the jackpot-related command (S4501). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot related command (S4501: Yes), a jackpot related process is executed (S4502), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot related process (S4502), which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 of FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). In the jackpot-related process, the third symbol display device 81 performs a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether the jackpot related command received by the hit related process (S4216) has received the jackpot start command (S4601). When the jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S4602), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4601 that a jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S4603). When the round number command is received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4604), and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the information indicating the round number is transmitted as the round number command from the main controller 110, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the volume of command data transmitted from the control device 110, in the case of a configuration in which information indicating that a new round has been started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command Good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4603 that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that an ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), a display ending command is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to on (S4607). When it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command not including card notification is set (S4608). That is, processing for preventing the display mode of FIG. 10A from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4607 that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4607: No), the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609). If it is determined that the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including card alert is set (S4610), and the card alert flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, the process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to on (S4612: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to off (S4613), and the processing of S4610 to S4611 described above is executed. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4612 that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the jackpot related process (S4502 in FIG. 64), game information about the jackpot game being executed (opening, as various display modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game is displayed. In addition to the processing for setting the display content of the ending and the number of rounds), the processing for determining whether or not to display the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

  This card forgotten warning alert screen is displayed when a player acquires a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of winning balls in a winning game (big hit game, small hit game), and rents a card (ball to the player). This is a notification mode for calling attention so as not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the card described above when the winning ball number acquired in the period (continuous advantageous period) from winning the normal state to winning the jackpot and returning to the normal state again satisfies a condition that can reach a predetermined amount. It is configured to display a forgetting reminder screen.

  Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, a jackpot (bonus A, which can easily win a prize ball exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) with the jackpot (first win) won in the normal state. If the jackpot B) is won, a card alert that displays a forgetting card warning screen will be displayed at the end of the jackpot game, and if the other jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D) are won, the card alert will be executed. It is configured not to.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a card forgotten warning screen is displayed for a player who has not won a predetermined amount of prize balls, and the game can be continued while borrowing a ball. It is possible to prevent discomfort for the player who performs the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the jackpot game, a game state (latency probability state) in which a small hit game is likely to be executed frequently can be set. Therefore, by repeating the small hit game, the player can There are cases where a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls is obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and if the accumulated result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), the execution is performed at that time. It is configured to display a warning screen for forgetting a card on the ending screen of the middle jackpot game or the small jackpot game. Thereby, a card forgetting attention alert screen can be displayed at an appropriate timing for the player.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that a card forgetting attention alert screen may be alert | reported only once during one advantageous continuation period. Thereby, it can suppress that the card forgetting attention alert screen is displayed frequently and gives a player discomfort. Note that the method for displaying the card forgotten warning screen is not limited to the content of the present embodiment. For example, a measuring means for measuring an advantageous duration is provided, and the elapsed time since the last card forgotten warning screen is displayed. May be displayed again when a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) is exceeded. In this case, since the card forgotten warning screen is displayed once (because the display conditions for displaying the card forgotten warning screen are already satisfied), during the special symbol change period (for example, during the advantageous duration) In this case, the forgetting card warning screen may be displayed when a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds or more is selected.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the player's fixed concept that a card forgetting attention alert screen is displayed after the jackpot game ends. Further, as a technique for achieving the same effect, the big hit game may display the card forgetting warning screen using the opening period of the small hit game.

  Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S4501 that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received a jackpot related command (S4503). When it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4503: Yes), a small hit related process (S4504) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the small hit related process (S4504) which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 of FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related processing (S4504). In the small hit related process, the third symbol display device 81 performs a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when winning the small hit. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the small hit related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether or not the hit related command received in the hit related process (S4216) has received the small hit start command (S4701). When the small hitting start command is received (S4701: Yes), the display small hitting start command is set (S4702), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the received command is not a small hitting start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S4703: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S4703: Yes), a display ending command is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). . If it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command not including card notification is set (S4706), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4705 that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4708), and a display ending command including card notification is set ( S4709), the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even in a small hit game that does not satisfy the display condition for displaying the card forgotten warning alert screen in one game, after winning a big hit in a normal state, If the cumulative value of the number of winning balls acquired during the game period (advantageous duration) until the normal state is set again meets the display conditions (for example, the number of winning winning balls reaches 250), Even after the game is over, the forgetting card warning screen is displayed. Thereby, a card forgetting attention alert screen can be displayed at an appropriate timing for the player.

  Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4503 that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4505: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball number counter 223u (S4506), and then the card It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter 223u added in the processing of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). If it is determined that the value of the added prize ball number counter 223u is 250 or more (S4508), the card notification enable flag is set to ON (S4509), and the display prize ball number command is set (S4510). This process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4507 that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the process of S4508, the added prize ball number counter 223u is less than 250. If it is determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is determined by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) that the normal state has been set, and the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared. The prize ball number counter 223u accumulates the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the previous period (advantageous continuation period). Then, at the end of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) (at the ending screen display timing), the forgetting card warning screen is displayed according to the value of the winning ball counter 223u.

  Thus, for example, when the jackpot (first win) that triggers the advantageous duration is a jackpot C (a jackpot that is difficult to win a predetermined amount (250) prize balls in one jackpot game) Can display a forgetting card warning screen when winning a small hit game during the advantageous continuation period or winning a big hit C again.

  Next, the remaining number update processing (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process (S4218). This remaining number update process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the remaining short time command is sent from the main controller 110. Is received, the processing for updating the contents set in the remaining short time count area 223k, the remaining variation time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

  In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining short time number command is received from the main controller 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining short-time command has not been received (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4801 that the remaining short time command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display short time command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and the process ends.

  Next, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220). In the temporary stop related process (S4220), when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time and the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command are received, the third symbol display device A process of setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed at 81 is executed.

  When the temporary stop related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901). If it is determined that it has not been received (S4901: No), the change restart process is performed. (S4902) is executed. Details of the change restart process (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: YES), the remaining variation time of the variation pattern currently set is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the remaining variation time calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904). If it is determined that the remaining variation time is less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the remaining variation time is stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4904, when it is determined that the remaining variation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), the remaining variation period is 2 seconds or more and is longer than 15 seconds. If it is determined that it is less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the remaining variation time information storage area 223o indicates that it is a normal remaining variation time. Is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4906, when it is determined that the remaining variation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeding 15 seconds) (S4906: No), it indicates that the remaining variation time is long in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o. A period C is set (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when special figure fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when special figure fluctuation is interrupted (subtraction of special figure fluctuation time is interrupted) and corresponds to that period By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing when the special figure change is resumed.

  In the present embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o corresponding to the variation time (remaining variation period) executed when the special figure variation is resumed is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, selection of each period information so that the period A is easily selected as the remaining time is short, and the period C is easily selected as the remaining time is long. The ratio may be configured to vary according to the remaining time, or the remaining period is divided at a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and the periods A to C are allocated in order to each of the divided periods. It may be configured.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the remaining variation time. It is possible to provide fun to predict the fluctuation time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the change restart process (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the change restart process (S4902). This variation restart process (S4902) executes a process for setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 variation restart command is received.

  When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that it has not been received (S5001: No), this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5001 that the special figure 1 change restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), then the remaining change time information stored in the remaining change time information storage area 223o is read (S5002). The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read remaining variation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, a display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the remaining variation time information storage area o is cleared (S5005), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation is resumed after the normal production (the production display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) ends. A swing effect that swings and displays the 3rd symbol is executed in the period until it is performed, and when the special figure change is resumed, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (residual change period) after the restart is executed However, other configurations may be used.

  For example, an effect period discriminating unit that discriminates a normal effect period in which the normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period discriminating unit determines that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. Also good. By comprising in this way, since a normal production | presentation and an additional production | presentation can be performed continuously, the production | presentation display more suitable for a player can be provided. In this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure change period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for swinging and displaying the third symbol may be executed. Further, an error period determining means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining means determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. You may comprise as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is performed based on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S5105. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the special display variation display setting process (S5104) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) which is one process in the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. To do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variation display setting process (S5104). In the special figure 1 variation display setting (S5104), when the current gaming state is the latent state, the first special symbol is displayed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. A process of setting a latent variation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the extracted fluctuation pattern is read (S5201), and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time read in the process of S5201 is sub-figure 1. The variation time counter 223m is set (S5202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5203). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), a display rush entry command is set (S5204), and the rush display flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is greater than 0 (S5203: Yes), the processes of S5204 and S5205 described above are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a display-specific latent variation pattern command for the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5103 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60). A variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that the first special symbol is supported, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the processing of S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (see FIG. 59) of the main processing (see FIG. 59). In step S4102, the data is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, and the special control pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5106).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Since there is, the process of S5111 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the special display variation display setting process (S5109) for special figure 2, which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process (S5109).

  In the variation display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5301), and the variation that has been read out. A value corresponding to the time is set in the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S5303). If it is determined that the state is the latent state (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush display flag 223t is on (S5304). If it is determined that the rush display flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5308.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5306, when it is determined that the remaining time read out is 1 second or more (S5306: No), the display rush entry command is set (S5307), and the rush display flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a display special probability variation pattern command for the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or when it is determined in the process of S5304 that the rush display flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the processing of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the processing of S5309 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, when the variation display of the first special symbol is set, that is, during the big hit variation period, the latent state is When the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation is set, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is changing, and it is determined that the special symbol 2 is not changing. Is configured to set a rush entry command as an effect mode of the variable display. That is, it is configured to display a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that the rush has entered the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 variation is executed. doing.

  On the other hand, when setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation that is in the latent state during the jackpot variation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is varying, When it is determined that 2 is changing, a screen (see FIG. 6B) indicating that the state is in the latent state without setting the display rush entry command is set as an effect mode of the change display. It is configured to display.

  Accordingly, when a right-handed game is performed at the time when a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that a rush has been entered is displayed by setting a display rush rush command, immediately The lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state can be executed, and a game without a sense of incongruity can be provided to the player.

  In addition, when setting a variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation that is in the latent state during the jackpot variation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is varying, and the special diagram 2 If it is determined that is changing, it is possible to forcibly terminate the changing special figure 2 fluctuation and execute a new special figure 2 fluctuation.

  In addition, the setting timing of the display rush entry command when the game state shifts to the latent state during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment, and a game without a sense of incongruity is provided to the player. It suffices if the configuration is such that For example, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 that is fluctuating at the timing when the latent state is set, a display rush inrush command may be set, or fluctuates when the latent state is set. It is also possible to determine the remaining time until the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the middle is finished, and to set the display rush inrush command when the judgment result is a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, as the predetermined time to be set, it takes from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 to start the right-handed game until the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640. The time may be shorter than the period, and may be set as appropriate according to the configuration of the game board 13.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It transmits to the control apparatus 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and receives the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5111: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and if the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S5112).

  In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process ends. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. . Note that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the judgment result is out of place. Is done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred to and the out symbol is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, various counter update processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter update processing (S4111). The various counter update processing (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one processing of the main processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the values of the various counters provided in the RAM 223 are displayed. This is a process for executing an update.

  In the various counter update processing (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, in the process of S5401, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5401: No), the process of S5402 is skipped, and S5403 Move on to processing. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). If it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S5404).

  Next, the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the reading of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n are executed (S5405), and the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is subtracted from the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n. Is subtracted to calculate the remaining time (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the value of other various counters is decremented by 1 (S5408), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5403, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5403: No), the above-described S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408 is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply apparatus 115 to the display control apparatus 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn in the meantime. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hits A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or out of complete) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to ON (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether there is a display rush entry command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a rush rush command (S6414: Yes), the rush rush command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the rush entry command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing a rush inrush command process. This rush inrush command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rush rush command process, first, a rush rush display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush rush effect indicated by the display rush rush command is determined, and the determined rush rush display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S6931). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6932).

  Next, based on the rush entry display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the rush entry command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display rush entry command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a command (S6416: Yes), an additional effect command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the additional effect command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing. This additional effect command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display additional effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the display additional effect command is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S6951). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6952).

  Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the additional effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no display additional effect command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the rear image change command process (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A and B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the others The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the RAM type (image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored) ( The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S6418 that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6420). If (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6421) will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the processing returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the details of the display setting process (S6303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, and thus a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  In the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer processing, so this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each back image type. Of the back image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and a transfer list set in the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 29) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 75B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether the symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where one variation display is being executed, another variation display may not be executed. And when a holding ball exists, it is good also as a structure which performs a variable display in an order from a holding ball in which a start winning is temporally old. With this configuration, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol), the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol and high probability of normal symbol) State), short-time state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) Yes. The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

  In other words, when the latent state is set, the variation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another game state. It is possible to execute the lottery that is advantageous to the player most efficiently by defining the length to be shorter than the case where the game is performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows the player to expect the latent state to be set.

  Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big win, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even in the case of a small win, so that the variation time of the second special symbol is short. In the state, the prize ball can continue to increase. Therefore, a game can be performed in expectation of becoming a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probability variation state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in this embodiment, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probability variation state, and thus novel gaming characteristics can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Using a variable method). As a result, even when the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be performed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a big hit or small hit stop symbol, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with an outlier stop symbol. Thus, during execution of the big hit or the small hit, it is possible to prevent the problem that the other variation display is fixedly displayed with the hit or the small hit and the big hit or the small hit is started in an overlapping manner.

  In the first embodiment, when the probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set, a variable display corresponding to a jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. The high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state shifts from the probability change state to the latent probability state. While this latent state is set, since the variable display (dynamic display) period for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, many lots of the second special symbol can be executed. This is a possible period (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantage Period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent state is set as the gaming state, When the player wins, the small hit game is frequently executed, and a gaming state advantageous to a player who can obtain a lot of prize balls (a special figure 2 advantageous state) is obtained.

  As described above, the period during which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that is won in the jackpot in the probability variation state. Therefore, when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game is executed. Thus, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) that are advantageous to the player are set in succession, various benefits are continuously given to the player. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a small win is won with one special symbol (Special Figure 2) and the small bonus game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (Special Figure 1) is interrupted (variable display period) Measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the suspended variable display period is resumed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. A certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special diagram 1), the other special symbol (special diagram 2) that is changing is displayed as a stop display that indicates a loss. Is configured to forcibly stop. By comprising in this way, the situation where a small hit game is performed during a big hit game can be prevented.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is varied according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the fact that the lottery result is out of the fluctuation of the other special symbol When the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (the lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the end of the provision of the second privilege (until the end of the small hit game), and is resumed after the end of the provision of the second privilege. In addition, when the lottery result of one special symbol is out of place, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  By configuring in this way, based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the lottery contents of the other special symbol (the period until the lottery result and lottery result are displayed) can be varied. A variety of playability can be provided.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can grant a privilege to a player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is varied according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the lottery result is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of control, the player is prevented from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery results that are given fewer benefits than the jackpot game (small hits) In this case, the variation table is used to prevent a bonus based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are changing at the same time, the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given by giving the privilege that is not the most advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not performed, and to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short display period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be executed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the case where the winning state is set in the state where the probability variation state is set and the first special symbol is won. Is displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period that is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the jackpot game. The second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to make the game eagerly so that the first advantageous period is set.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the big hit variation, and the latent probability state is set. In a state where is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) can be efficiently performed.

  Therefore, at the same time that the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state), the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second when the probability variation state is set. Both special symbols may also vary.

  In such a case, even if a display mode (see FIG. 7A) indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second currently changing state is displayed. Until the special symbol fluctuates, the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state cannot be executed, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed indefinitely even in the RUSH state. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the probability variation state), the variation state of the second special symbol (the presence or absence of variation, (Variable remaining period) is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is made different.

  Specifically, when the condition for transition to the latent state is established, when it is determined that the variation of the new second special symbol can be executed, the fact that the RUSH state has been set is notified. It is composed. Thereby, despite notifying that the RUSH state has been set, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the change of the new second special symbol is not started and the small hit game is not executed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied, a period from when the state of the new second special symbol can be changed to when the latent state ends is determined. When the determined period is less than the predetermined period, it is configured not to notify that the RUSH state is set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being started without executing the small hit game despite the notification that the RUSH state has been set.

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the probability variation state, the game state is changed by shifting the normal symbol high probability state to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot variation starts. It is configured to set the latent state, and when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol is not shifted to the low probability state when the big hit variation starts The probability variation state is continued even during the big hit variation. By comprising in this way, a different gameability can be provided according to the kind of special symbol.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and even when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state when the big hit variation starts. It may be configured to set a latent state as a gaming state by shifting to, and it is normal at the time when the big hit variation starts only when a specific big hit type is set among a plurality of big hit types The latent state may be set as the gaming state by shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state.

  Furthermore, measure the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number, shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state when the jackpot fluctuation starts The latent state may be set as the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in this embodiment, when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the probability variation state, the latent state is set to the period until the big hit variation ends at the time when the big hit variation starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to the predicted winning information is completed based on the prediction that the winning prize is predicted in the start winning process (see FIG. 47). It is also possible to configure so as to set a latent period (a plurality of variable periods) until it is done.

  In this embodiment, when the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected in the state where the latent probability state is set, the variation pattern table is always constant regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol during the latent probability state setting. (Refer to FIG. 19 (b)). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the latent state is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the data is selected, and to change the data table for selecting the variation pattern based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means.

  Specifically, if the number of changes in the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 50), the data table in which the average of the change time is about 2 seconds is referred to, and the change in the second special symbol When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to the data table in which the average of the variation time is about 1 second. As a result, when a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set as the big hit variation of the first special symbol is selected, it is possible to provide more small hit games to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the jackpot variation in the probability variation state, but in addition to this, the special symbol lottery result is a specific miss or a small hit. It may be configured so that the latent state is set during the fluctuation display in the case, or the number of times that the special symbol lottery result is out of the specified or the small hits reaches the predetermined number during the probability variation state. In this case, the latent state may be set.

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, each of the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, different display means may be provided between the display means for displaying the main symbol highlighted in the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols in the third symbol. Moreover, you may use structures other than a liquid crystal display as a structure of a display means.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game that aims at the right region of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (short-time state) advantageous to the player, and the left region of the game board 13 in a normal game state. The left-handed game is configured to be executed, but it is sufficient that the target area of the game board 13 is different depending on the gaming state. May execute a right-handed game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the game in a different game state can be performed aiming at the same area | region.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. It may be possible to use the operation means configured as a lever that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A discriminating touch sensor type operating means, a radio type operating means capable of discriminating an operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not on the main controller 110 but on the sound lamp controller 113 side.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in an effect performed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. The main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process for executing a game (lottery) and a game (lottery) result are displayed as effects. The processing for this may be executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the number of special symbols is not limited to this, and three or more special symbols are used. These special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gameability in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols is determined and the gameability in which a lottery (variation) is performed independently have been described. However, each of the gaming properties described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (possible a small hit during specific special figure fluctuation)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the information, a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the dynamic display means, and the second determination can be executed. Second determination means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first display means for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When 1 identification information is displayed, a 1st privilege game is performed, and when the said 2nd identification information for showing a specific 2nd determination result is displayed on the said 2nd display means, 2nd privilege game In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination; The gaming state setting means can set the first gaming state in the dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A1 characterized by

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is ended according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 publication). By the way, the gaming machine described above is executed because the period during which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery to be performed, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the winning is not performed immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period during which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming property that grants a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege granted to the player is greatly different. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine A1, since the first game state in which the second determination can be easily performed during the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed, the length of the period during which the first game state is set. Can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second determination means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed rather than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Since it can be made easy, the 1st game state can be made into the game state more advantageous to a player than the 2nd game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the hope that the first gaming state is set, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball, a second entrance means different from the first entrance means, the first entrance means, and the second entrance ball A third entering means different from the means, a first state in which the game ball can be guided to the second entering means, and entering the second entering means is more difficult than the first state. Variable means capable of changing between two states, wherein the first determination means is configured to input the first ball based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The second determination means is configured to execute the second determination based on a game ball entering the third ball entry means, and in the second game state, the second determination means is configured to execute the second determination. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be easily changed to the first state rather than the first gaming state. 3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the first determination can be made more difficult to execute in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. Therefore, in the state in which the first game state is set, it is possible to make it easier for the third ball entry means to play a ball and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. .

  In the gaming machine A3, after the first privilege game is executed, a high probability that a probability that is determined as the specific first determination result by the first determination is higher than normal is set. The game state setting means is displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the start of dynamic display of the first identification information.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information that is displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result by the first determination. Since the first gaming state is set based on the start, the process until the first gaming state is set can be set in stages. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game is set with fewer privileges that can be given to the player than the first privilege game. Machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second privilege game, since the privilege that can be given to the player is set to be smaller than that in the first privilege game, the privilege is excessively given to the player during the period in which the first gaming state is set. There is an effect that it can control giving.

<Characteristic B group> (Game content and special 1 and special 2 are set at once)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. Second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. Specific to the second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is displayed, A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game and executing the second bonus game when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In the gaming machine, period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed; The effect determining means for determining the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means, and the effect determined by the effect determining means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by having an execution executing means for executing.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is ended according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 publication). By the way, the gaming machine described above is executed because the period during which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery to be performed, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the winning is not performed immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period during which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming property that grants a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege granted to the player is greatly different. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine B1, since the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination unit is determined by the effect determination unit, Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide fun for predicting a future game based on the effect executed for the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first privilege game. Characteristic gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first privilege game It is possible to predict the contents. Therefore, since the player can be watched for the effect, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. It has a settable gaming state setting means, and the gaming state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. The gaming machine B3 is configured to execute the first gaming state during a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the first gaming state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first privilege game is executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is set. The game which aims at a 2nd privilege game using can be performed. Furthermore, since the period during which the first game state is set can be predicted by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to play the game eagerly during the first game state. effective.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a normal first privilege game as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and a small first privilege game with less privileges granted to the player than the normal first privilege game. And the first dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining a first period and a second period longer than the first period. The effect determining means includes the case where the small first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means, and the case where the bonus game executing means performs the normal first A gaming machine B4, wherein one bonus game is executed and an effect of the same mode is determined when the first period is determined by the period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect determining means is a combination of two advantageous factors for determining the contents of the effect, the effect determining means has the same mode. Since the effect is determined, by grasping the contents of the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of patterns of future game situations. And according to the progress state of the 1st game state, it becomes possible to raise the accuracy of prediction gradually. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of prediction for the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine B4, the effect determining means determines a specific effect when the normal first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to notify that the most advantageous game content has been set for the player, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic C group> (rush notification)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. Second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. Specific to the second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is displayed, A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game and executing the second bonus game when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In the gaming machine, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination can be set. When the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means and the gaming state setting means, it is determined that the first gaming state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. And a notification timing determination means for determining a notification timing for notifying a notification mode for showing to a person.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, in accordance with the lottery result, an advantageous gaming state (probability variation state) that is advantageous to the player is set for the period until winning the next jackpot after the bonus game is completed, and the player is notified that the gaming state has changed. There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect to be performed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). By the way, the gaming machine described above is configured to execute an effect to notify the effect based on the setting of the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. For example, the advantageous gaming state is set. Despite being in a state where a new lottery cannot be executed, the game state is informed and the player is discomforted. was there. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily performed can be determined based on the dynamic display status of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state has been set.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine C2 wherein the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first gaming state set based on the determination result of the first determination means executed separately from the second determination means is set, the notification is made based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. Timing is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand by combining the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time.

  The gaming machine C2 has dynamic display determination means for determining whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first gaming state is set, and the notification timing determination means When it is determined that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed by the automatic display determination means, the notification timing is determined based on the time point when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine C3 to play.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second determination can be executed immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first gaming state for a longer time.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, when the notification timing determination unit determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determination unit, the dynamic display of the second identification information ends. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing to perform.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are produced. That is, even if the first gaming state is set, during the period in which the second determination cannot be performed, the fact that the first gaming state has been set is not notified and the second determination can be executed. In this case, it is notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second determination cannot be executed despite the notification that the first gaming state has been set, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine C4, the gaming machine C4 has a remaining period determining unit that determines a period from the timing when the dynamic display of the second identification information is ended to the end of the first gaming state, based on the determination result by the remaining period determining unit The game machine C5 is characterized by comprising notification determination means for determining whether or not the notification timing is determined by the notification timing determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, since it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on a period during which the second determination can be performed during the first gaming state, for example, the second determination is performed during the first gaming state. When the executable period has become extremely short, the player can be prevented from notifying that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the first game state is finished in a short period of time despite notifying the player that the first game state has been set. There is an effect that can be done.

<Characteristic D group> (Simultaneous change discards jackpot, interrupts jackpot)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the predetermined period, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means is displayed. Two display means, second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and the first display means for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is displayed. A privilege game executing means to be executed, and a content of the second privilege game is a plurality of privilege contents. And a second privilege game type setting means for setting the second dynamic display means in a state in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed, and when the second identification information indicating that it is the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means, A game having stop control means for executing stop control for dynamic display by the first dynamic display means based on the benefit content set by the second privilege game type setting means. Machine D1.

  Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a gameability (so-called simultaneous variation type) in which a plurality of lotteries are executed simultaneously. In a gaming machine having such a game, when a lottery result of one lottery is a win, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed and other lottery games being executed are forced off Have been proposed (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine forcibly causes other lotteries to be stopped and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result in which the bonus game is executed is stopped and displayed regardless of the type of the bonus game. There was a problem of giving discomfort to the person. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine D1, since the stop control content for the first dynamic display can be set according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed, a situation that causes discomfort to the player is suppressed. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D1, the stop control unit is configured to stop and display the dynamic display by the first dynamic display unit with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. The game machine D2 is capable of executing a temporary stop control in which measurement of a period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means is stopped until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is possible to set whether the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege, and the privilege game to which a large privilege is granted is discarded by executing the privilege game to which a small privilege is granted. There is an effect that this can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second privilege game type setting means can set the first privilege type and the second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type, and the stop The gaming machine D3, wherein the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second privilege type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination unit is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display unit ends, and the specific first determination Until the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed on the first display means, the second privilege game type setting means has an invalid means for invalidating the setting of the second benefit type. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalid means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it can suppress that a 1st privilege game and the 2nd privilege game in which the 2nd privilege type was set are performed continuously, and that an excessive privilege is provided with respect to a player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determination means, A gaming machine D5 that makes it easier to set the first privilege type than the second privilege type.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the first privilege type is more easily set than the second privilege type, even if a large number of second privilege games are executed, it is possible to suppress an excessive privilege being given to the player. There is.

<Other Thought 1> (A latent state can be set before and after the jackpot game)
First determination means capable of performing first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second determination means, second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, When the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, a first privilege game is executed, and a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. When the second identification information for display is displayed, in a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game, the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination. The first determination is executed rather than the first gaming state and the second determination. A gaming state setting means capable of setting the second gaming state, and the gaming state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information when a predetermined first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine that sets the first gaming state after the first bonus game is completed when the first gaming state is set during a predetermined period and a predetermined second condition is satisfied. E1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is ended according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 publication). By the way, the gaming machine described above is executed because the period during which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery to be performed, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the winning is not performed immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period during which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming property that grants a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege granted to the player is greatly different. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided before and after the first privilege game, so that an unexpected game can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, There is a game in which an advantageous privilege game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the interest of games.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a first determination unit capable of executing the first determination, and a first identification information for displaying a determination result by the first determination unit. 1 display means, first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A first dynamic display period determining means for determining; a second determining means capable of executing a second determination; a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determining means; A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means, and a second period for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. A specific first determination result is indicated on the dynamic display period determining means and the first display means. When the first identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, A bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game, and the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is dynamic. A period determining means for determining a dynamic display period to be displayed, and an effect for determining an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means It comprises a determining means and an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1, wherein the effect determination means includes the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, the game content of the first privilege game, Based on the above, the effect is determined.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination and the first gaming state than the second determination. A gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state that facilitates execution of one determination, and the gaming state setting means displays the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. The first gaming state is executed during a dynamic display period in which the first identification information to be played is dynamically displayed.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine of technical idea 2 or 3, wherein the first privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is normally a first privilege game and its normal first privilege game. A first privilege game setting means capable of setting a small first privilege game with less privilege to be given to the player, wherein the first dynamic display period determining means includes a first period and its first A second period longer than the period can be determined, and the effect determination means executes the small first privilege game by the privilege game execution means, and the second period is determined by the period determination means. The production of the same mode is determined when the case is determined and when the first bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means and the first period is determined by the period determining means. .
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, wherein the effect determining means executes the normal first privilege game by the privilege game executing means, and the period determining means performs the first When two periods are determined, a specific effect is determined.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and a first period for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A dynamic display period determining means; a second determining means capable of executing a second determination; a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determining means; Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means, and a second dynamic display period for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. A first means for indicating a specific first determination result on the determining means and the first display means; When the different information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is displayed. A privilege game execution means to be executed, and the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A period determining means for determining a display period, an effect determining means for determining an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means, And an effect execution means for executing the effect determined by the effect determination means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first privilege game.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are produced. That is, a gaming state in which a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination can be set. Dynamic display in which the first identification information that is to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The first gaming state is executed during the period.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 or 3, the following effect is obtained. That is, as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a normal first privilege game and a small first privilege game with less privilege given to the player than the normal first privilege game are set. And a first dynamic display period determining unit capable of determining a first period and a second period longer than the first period, and determining the effect. The means includes the case where the small first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means, and the case where the normal first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. When the first period is determined by the period determination means, the same effect is determined.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the effect determining means determines a specific effect when the normal first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. .
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
S306 1st determination means S308 Game state setting means S504 1st dynamic display period setting means S508 1st dynamic display means S905 2nd determination means S1205 2nd dynamic display period setting means S1209 2nd dynamic display means S2204 Special game execution means S5109 effect determination means S5309 demonstration execution hand stage

Claims (2)

First determination means capable of executing the first determination;
First display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means;
First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means;
First dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means;
A second determination means capable of executing a second determination;
Second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means;
Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means;
Second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means;
First running benefits game, certain of the second determination result to the second display means when the first identification information to indicate particular the first determination result to the first display means is displayed stopped in the gaming machine in which the second identification information had, and benefits game execution means for executing a second award game when it is stopped and displayed to indicate,
After the first identification information that is to be stopped and displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed until the dynamic display is stopped and displayed. Effect determining means for determining an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information to be executed;
Effect execution means for executing the effect determined by the effect determination means;
A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. And having
The gaming state setting means stops the dynamic display after the first identification information that is to be stopped and displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine, characterized in that the first gaming state can be set based on the establishment of a setting opportunity for setting the first gaming state before being displayed . 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising display means capable of displaying the effect executed by the effect executing means .

Images